gc 35 tecnical reference manual

23

Upload: j-c-del-rio

Post on 06-Jan-2016

162 views

Category:

Documents


15 download

DESCRIPTION

sistema v caterpillar

TRANSCRIPT

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 123

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 223

GC-35 Control BoxTechnical Reference Manual

Part Number 1001548-02

Rev A

copyCopyright Topcon Positioning Systems Inc

January 2014

All contents in this manual are copyrighted by Topcon Positioning Systems Inc All rights reserved

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 323

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 423

iPN 1001548-02

bull bull bull bull bull bull

Table of Contents

Preface iii

Terms and Conditions iii

Manual Conventions vIntroduction 1

Features 1

Powering the Control Box OnOff 2

Control Screen 2

Accessing the Technicianrsquos Menu 3

Technicianrsquos Menu 9

Configuration 10

Configuration Codes 10 Averaging 11

Valve Type 11

Proportional Current 11

Proportional Pulse Width Modulated 11

Solenoid 11

Danfoss 12

Valve Drive 12

Dither Amplitude 12Dither Frequency 12

Frequency 12

Max Current 12

Hour 13

External Auto 13

Auto Power (Paver Only) 13

Esup2 Reset 13

Lock Menu 14Lock Menu Settings 14

Elevation Gains (Raise and Lower) 14

Slope Gain 15

Valve Offsets (Raise and Lower) 15

Elevation Deadband 15

Slope Deadband 16

Working Window Adjustment 16

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 523

iiPN 1001548-02

Slope Working Window 18

Smartlink (Elevation and Slope) 18

Warranty 19

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 623

Preface iiGC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

bull bull bull bull bull bull

Preface

Thank you for purchasing this Topcon product The materials available in this Manual (the ldquoManualrdquo) have been preparedby Topcon Positioning Systems Inc (ldquoTPSrdquo) for owners of Topcon products and are designed to assist owners with theuse of the product and its use is subject to these terms and conditions (the ldquoTerms and Conditionsrdquo)

Terms and Conditions

Use

This product is designed to be used by a professional The user should have a good knowledge of the safe use of theproduct and implement the types of safety procedures recommended by the local government protection agency for bothprivate use and commercial job sites

Copyrights

All information contained in this Manual is the intellectual property of and copyrighted material of TPS All rights arereserved Do not use access copy store display create derivative works of sell modify publish distribute or allow anythird party access to any graphics content information or data in this Manual without TPSrsquo express written consent andmay only use such information for the care and operation of the product The information and data in this Manual are avaluable asset of TPS and are developed by the expenditure of considerable work time and money and are the result oforiginal selection coordination and arrangement by TPS

Trademarks

HiPer SRtrade TRUtrade Magnettrade Pocket-3Dtrade Topconreg and Topcon Positioning Systemstrade are trademarks or registeredtrademarks of TPS Windowsreg is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation The Bluetoothreg word mark and logosare owned by Bluetooth SIG Inc and any use of such marks by Topcon Positioning Systems Inc is used under licenseOther product and company names mentioned herein may be trademarks of their respective owners

Disclaimer of Warranty

EXCEPT FOR ANY WARRANTIES IN AN APPENDIX OR A WARRANTY CARD ACCOMPANYING THE PRODUCT THIS MANUAL AND THE PRODUCT ARE PROVIDED ldquoAS-ISrdquo THERE ARE NO OTHER WARRANTIES TPS DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIEDWARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR USE OR PURPOSE TPS AND ITS DISTRIBUTORSSHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR TECHNICAL OR EDITORIAL ERRORS OR OMISSIONS CONTAINED HEREIN NOR FORINCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM THE FURNISHING PERFORMANCE OR USE OF THIS

MATERIAL OR THE PRODUCT SUCH DISCLAIMED DAMAGES INCLUDE BUT ARE NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF TIME LOSSOR DESTRUCTION OF DATA LOSS OF PROFIT SAVINGS OR REVENUE OR LOSS OF THE PRODUCTrsquoS USE IN ADDITIONTPS IS NOT RESPONSIBLE OR LIABLE FOR DAMAGES OR COSTS INCURRED IN CONNECTION WITH OBTAININGSUBSTITUTE PRODUCTS OR SOFTWARE CLAIMS BY OTHERS INCONVENIENCE OR ANY OTHER COSTS IN ANY EVENTTPS SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES OR OTHERWISE TO YOU OR ANY OTHER PERSON OR ENTITY IN EXCESSOF THE PURCHASE PRICE FOR THE PRODUCT

Please read the terms and conditions carefully

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 723

erms and Conditions ivGC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

License Agreement

Use of any computer programs or software supplied by TPS or downloaded from a TPS website (the ldquoSoftwarerdquo) inconnection with the product constitutes acceptance of these Terms and Conditions in this Manual and an agreementto abide by these Terms and Conditions The user is granted a personal non-exclusive non-transferable license touse such Software under the terms stated herein and in any case only with a single product You may not assign ortransfer the Software or this license without the express written consent of TPS This license is effective untilterminated You may terminate the license at any time by destroying the Software and Manual TPS may terminatethe license if you fail to comply with any of the Terms or Conditions You agree to destroy the Software and manual

upon termination of the use of the product All ownership copyright and other intellectual property rights in and tothe Software belong to TPS If these license terms are not acceptable return any unused software and manual

Confidentiality

This Manual its contents and the Software (collectively the ldquoConfidential Informationrdquo) are the confidential andproprietary information of TPS You agree to treat TPSrsquo Confidential Information with a degree of care no less stringentthat the degree of care you would use in safeguarding your own most valuable trade secrets Nothing in this paragraphshall restrict you from disclosing Confidential Information to your employees as may be necessary or appropriate tooperate or care for the product Such employees must also keep the Confidentiality Information confidential In theevent you become legally compelled to disclose any of the Confidential Information you shall give TPS immediatenotice so that it may seek a protective order or other appropriate remedy

Website Other Statements

No statement contained at the TPS website (or any other website) or in any other advertisements or TPS literatureor made by an employee or independent contractor of TPS modifies these Terms and Conditions (including theSoftware license warranty and limitation of liability)

Safety

Improper use of the product can lead to injury to persons or property andor malfunction of the product The productshould only be repaired by authorized TPS warranty service centers Users should review and heed the safety warnings

in an Appendix

Miscellaneous

The above Terms and Conditions may be amended modified superseded or canceled at any time by TPS The aboveTerms and Conditions will be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of Californiawithout reference to conflict of laws

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 823

Manual Conventions vGC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Manual Conventions

This manual uses the following conventions

Convention Description Example

Bold Menu or drop-down menu item File Exit (Click the File menu and clickExit)

Name of a dialog box or screen From the Connection screen

Button or key commands Click Finish

Mono User supplied text or variable Type guest and click Enter

Italic Reference to another manual or help document Refer to the Topcon Reference Manual

Further information to note about system configuration maintenance or setup

Supplementary information that can have an adverse affect on system operation systemperformance data integrity measurements or personal safety

Notification that an action has the potential to result in system damage loss of data loss ofwarranty or personal injury

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 923

Introduction 1GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

bull bull bull bull bull bull

Introduction

The Technicians Menu contains additional system menu items not available to the operator (end user) in the GC-35 Control Box Performance Menu

These menu items offer the ability to override default settings of the P-32 system to improve system performancein certain situations These menu items are not however meant to be changed by the operator

The following sections describe the features of the GC-35 control box and explain how to access the TechnicianrsquosMenu select a menu item save the new value and exit the Technicianrsquos Menu

Features

Figure 1 GC-35 Control Box

Access to the Technicianrsquos Menu is intended for and should be limited to Topcon qualified dealerand field service technicians Any changes to the factory default settings without a thoroughunderstanding to their effects on the P-32 system may cause adverse consequences to systemaccuracy and operation

Auto Indicator LED

Auto Button

Survey Button

Elevation Indicator

LED (Green)

Slope Indicator

LED (Yellow)

SlopeElevation

Button

Jog UpDown

Buttons

LCD

Light Sensor

Power OnOff

Button

Grade Adjustment

Knob

Grade Adjustment

Arrows

Menu Selection

Buttons

Grade Indicator

LEDs

USB Port

USB Cap

(Removed)

Jaw Mount

Power Connector

Sonic Tracker or Slope Sensor

Connectors

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1023

owering the Control Box OnOff 2GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Powering the Control Box OnOff

Figure 2 Power OnOff

Control ScreenThe Control Screen displays when you power on the control box It is your interface with the components ofthe P-32 system The Control Screen changes depending on how you have configured the Control Box and theP-32 system

The illustration below shows an example of a Control Box set up to display information from a secondary ControlBox set up for Slope Control

Figure 3 Control Screen

Power OnOff

Button

Startup Screen Shutdown Screen

GC-35

Shutting Down

con1047297g 21

Elevation Set

Point Value

Actual Elevation

Sensor Reading

Slope Set Point Value

PositiveNegative

Slope Indicator Icon

Actual Slope

Sensor Reading

MenuSet

Button Function

Display Area

Elevation Icon

Units (ftincm)

ST-3 SurfaceStringline Mode Icon

Display Slope Box

Auto Icon

Slope Icon

Primary Control Box Display Area

Secondary Control Box

Display Area

Cross Communication

On-Grade Icon

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1123

ccessing the Technicianrsquos Menu 3GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Accessing the Technicianrsquos Menu

1 From the Control Screen press the MenuSet button

2 Rotate the Grade Adjustment Knob to scroll through the menu selections displayed on the screen

3 Select Tech Menu and press and hold the Enter button for three (3) seconds to enter the

Technicianrsquos Menu

Figure 4 Accessing the Technicianrsquos Menu

Press MenuSet Button Turn Grade Adjustment Knob Press and Hold

Enter Button for 3 Seconds

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1223

Technicianrsquos Menu 9GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

bull bull bull bull bull bull

Technicianrsquos Menu

This chapter describes the Technicianrsquos Menu items and their default factory settings

Table 1 lists the available menus

Table 1 Technicianrsquos Menu Settings

Menu Item Range Default Factory Setting

Configuration External 0ndash31 Custom External

Averaging 1 ndash 100 50

Valve Type Solenoid ProportionalDanfoss Pulse WidthModulated

Proportional

Valve Drive Sink Source Sink

Dither Amplitude 0ndash15 4

Dither Frequency 0ndash105 42

Frequency 1ndash13Hz

225ndash1950Hz

5Hz

Max Current 067ndash48 Amps 175 Amps

Hour Read only Hours 00

Hours Auto 00

External Auto On Off Invert Off

Auto Power Up (Paver only) On Off On

Esup2 Reset Cancel Reset Cancel

Lock Menu Level 1 - Unlocked

Level 2 - Moderate

Level 3 - Restricted

Level 1 - Unlocked

Elevation Gains Raise 1 ndash 200 Raise 25

Lower 1 ndash 200 Lower 25

Slope Gain 1 ndash 100 25

Valve Offsets Raise 1 ndash 999 Raise 135

Lower 1 ndash 999 Lower 135

Elevation Deadband 1 ndash 30 mm 3 mm

Slope Deadband 0025 ndash 075 0075

Working Window 0ndash500 Off 020 ft

Slope Working Window 01-100 20

Smartlink Slope 0 - 100 Slope 0

Elevation 0 - 100 Elevation 0

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1323

onfiguration 10GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Configuration

This setting selects a valve drive configuration and has up to 32 preprogrammed configurations to select from You may also create a custom configuration

Configuration Value Range External 0-31 Custom

Default External

bull External ndash Upon power up the control box looks for an external configuration resistor between pins Land K of the 11 pin bulkhead connector and defaults to the listed configuration table for valve control

The configuration number displays on the control box LCD when the box is turned onbull Value between 0-31 ndash The control box defaults to the valve control parameters for this number listed inthe configuration chart (see Table 2 on page 10) The configuration number displays on the control boxLCD when the box is turned on

bull Custom ndash Create a custom valve control configuration by setting the Valve Type Current DirectionCurrent Limit Frequency (for PWM modes and Solenoid) Dither Amplitude (except Solenoid mode) andDither Frequency (except Solenoid mode)

Configuration Codes

Table 2 lists available configurations

Table 2 Configuration Codes

ConfigResistor

(ohms)

Drive Type Current Direction Dither Amplitude Dither Freq Freq Hz Current Limit

0 0 Sol Sink None None Adj None

1 77

2 160

3 249

4 341

5 441 Sol Source None None Adj None

6 560 Sol Source None None Adj None

7 670

8 800 Sol Source None None Adj None

9 940 Sol Source None None Adj None10 1100 Sol Sink None None Adj None

11 1260 Sol Source None None Adj

12 1445

14 1890

15 2140 Pro Cur Source 6 42 NA 175A

17 2760 Sol Sink None None Adj None

18 3140 Sol Sink None None Adj None

19 3583 Sol Source None None Adj None

20 4104 Sol Sink None None Adj None

21 4725 Sol Sink None None Adj None

22 5480 Sol

23 6414

26 11310 Sol Source None None Adj None

27 14440

28 19440

29 28670

30 51500 Pro Cur Source 12 42 NA 175A

31 open Pro Cur Sink 6 42 NA 175A

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1423

veraging 11GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Averaging

Averaging changes the amount of dampening or filtering applied to the laser receiver or elevation sensormeasurements Averaging can be thought of as the time period over which a running average of the elevationmeasurement is calculated

Averaging Value Range 1ndash100

Default 50

A lower value averages fewer elevation measurements allowing the system to react more quickly to grade

changes

A larger value averages more elevation measurements making the system less reactive to fluctuations in gradesuch as with laser ldquobeam bouncerdquo on windy days

Valve Type

Valve Type allows you to select the type of valves used on your machine

Valve Type Value Range Solenoid Servo Proportional Danfoss Pulse PWMDefault Proportional

The following sections describe each of these valve types

Proportional Current

Proportional Current provides a current regulated proportional output and is the preferred setting forproportional valves

A percentage of the total current setting is calculated based on the gain setting and given grade correctionProportional Current control applies full machine voltage to the valve coil until the desired current is reachedthen the voltage is turned off When the current drops below the desired value the process is repeated

Proportional Pulse Width Modulated

Proportional Pulse Width Modulated provides a pulse width regulated proportional output

A percentage of the total duty cycle is calculated based on the gain setting and the given grade correction PulseWidth Modulation cycles the output voltage on and off at the desired duty cycle

Solenoid

Solenoid operates the same as PWM mode except set up specifically for the lower frequency solenoid valves

Danfoss

Danfoss provides a proportional voltage output to drive the specific requirements of the Danfoss brand ofproportional valves In this mode switched power (Vsw) and ground connect to the Danfoss valve through thevalve cable and the Raise output pin of the control box controls the reference signal to the valve In a neutral(no grade) correction output the reference signal is held at half of the switched voltage For example if a 12volt system produced 13 volts on the Vsw line 65 volts are held on the reference output for a no correctionsignal

bull For a raise correction signal the control box increases the reference voltage from 65 to a maximum of975 V

Averaging does not affect slope control

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1523

alve Drive 12GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

bull For a lower output signal the control box decreases the reference voltage to a minimum of 325 V

Valve Drive

Valve Drive selects the current direction of the valves on the machine

Valve Drive Value Range Sink Source

Select Sink if the valve has a permanent positive connection and needs a switched negative connection (thecontrol box sinks current)

Select Source if the valve has a permanent ground (negative) connection and needs a switched positiveconnection (the control box sources current)

Dither Amplitude

Dither Amplitude allows you to select the amount of dither to apply to the valve

Dither is a continuous low frequency ldquopulserdquo applied to the valve drive signal for proportional valves to keep thevalversquos spool from sticking

Dither Amplitude Value Range 0ndash15

Dither Amplitude is a percentage of full current for the Proportional Current valve type or duty cycle for thePWM valve type Dither does not apply for Solenoid Danfoss or Servo valve types

Dither Frequency

Dither Frequency adjusts the frequency of the dither in cycles per second

Dither Frequency Value Range 0ndash105 Hz

Frequency

Frequency adjusts the number of pulses sent to control valves in one secondFrequency Value Range 1ndash13 Hz 225ndash1950 Hz

The frequency value is adjustable from 1 to 13 Hz for Solenoid valves On Pulse Width Modulated mode valvesthe range is 225 to 1950 Hz

Max Current

Max Current adjusts the maximum valve drive current that the control box outputs when using ProportionalCurrent valve output mode and the over-current trip level for other valve types

Current Limit Value Range 067ndash48 Amps

If a Danfoss valve sees a reference voltage greater than 75 of Vsw or below 25 of Vsw the valvedefaults to an ldquoerrorrdquo state and the valve is held in the neutral position

Frequency does not apply for Proportional Current and Danfoss valve types

Changing the Frequency has an effect on the Offset Check the Offset after changing theFrequency

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1623

our 13GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Hour

Hour displays the amount of hours the control box has been operating and the amount of hours the control boxhas been operating in Automatic

Hour Settings No settings (read only)

External Auto

External Auto disables or enables an external automanual switch

External Auto Settings OnOffInvert

If On is selected the system requires both an external AM switch and activation of the Control Boxrsquos Autobutton to switch the system in and out of Automatic control Activate the external AM switch by connectingpin E of the 11 PIN bulkhead to ground

If you select Invert connecting pin E to ground takes the system out of Automatic control Automatic controlactivates only when pin E is connected to power such as when connecting to an in-motion switch

Auto Power (Paver Only)

The Auto Power setting allows the system to automatically power up to the last used mode

Auto Power Settings OnOff

When the Auto Power setting is On the system powers up in the last mode seen before power down (Auto orManual) For example the paver is in automatic control is shut down and then powered up once more Thepaver is now ready to pave in Auto

When the Auto Power setting is Off the operator must press the Auto button to return to Auto after a powerdown

Esup2 Reset

Esup2 Reset reconfigures the system to factory settings

Esup2 Reset Settings Range CancelReset

To reset all settings in the Performance Menu and the Technician Menu to factory defaults select Reset and press and hold the Enter button for three (3) seconds

To cancel and return to the previous screen select Cancel

Lock Menu

The Lock-Out Setting allows certain Performance Settings in the Performance Menu to be made inaccessibleto the operator (see ldquoPaver Lock Menu Settingsrdquo on page 14)

If the Auto Power setting is On the machine powers up in Auto any time it was shut down in AutoOnly use Auto Power On in asphalt paver applications

Setting Auto Power to On for a machine other than asphalt pavers is not recommended Seriousinjury to operators or bystanders from unexpected machine movement could result

If you select Reset the Control Box reverts your custom Control Box settings back to their factorydefault values

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1723

levation Gains (Raise and Lower) 14GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Lock-Out Value Range Level 1 - Unlocked Level2 - Moderate Level 3 - Restricted

bull Level 1 ndash all Performance Menu items are accessible to the operator

bull Level 2ndash some items no longer appear in the Performance Menu and are only accessible in theTechnicianrsquos Menu

bull Level 3 ndash additional items no longer appear in the Performance Menu and are only accessible in theTechnicianrsquos Menu

Lock Menu Settings

Table 3 lists the settings that can be locked out (made unavailable)

Elevation Gains (Raise and Lower)

Elevation Gains determines the speed at which your Topcon P-32 System allows the tow point cylinders to adjustto a change in elevation For faster hydraulic response increase the gain value For slower hydraulic responsedecrease the gain value

The objective is to set the gain so the screed reacts to the change in grade quickly but without ldquoovershootingrdquothe new elevation

Gain Elevation Value Range 1-200

Table 3 Paver Lock Menu Settings

Performance Menu Item Level 1 - Unlocked Level 2 - Moderate Level 3 - Restricted

1 Elevation Gains Available Available Locked

2 Slope Gain Available Available Locked

3 Valve Offsets Available Available Locked

4 Elevation Deadband Available Locked Locked

5 Slope Deadband Available Locked Locked

6 Averaging Available Locked Locked

7 Machine Type Available Available Available

8 Display Available Available Available

9 Units Available Available Available

10 System Info Available Available Available

11 Sonic Tracker 3 Available Available Available

12 Slope Resolution Available Available Available

13 Slope Cal Block Available Available Locked

14 Tech Menu Available Available Available

Before setting the Elevation Gain make sure the machines hydraulic flow controls valves are adjustedfor proper cylinder speed according to the manufacturers recommendations

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1823

lope Gain 15GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Slope Gain

This setting determines the speed at which your Topcon P-32 System allows the tow point cylinders to adjustto a change in slope For faster hydraulic response increase the gain value For slower hydraulic responsedecrease the gain value

The objective is to set the gain so the screed reacts to the change in grade quickly but without ldquoovershootingrdquoOn-Grade Slope Gain should not be set at a higher value than the Elevation Gain on the other side of the paver

Gain Elevation Value Range 1-100

Valve Offsets (Raise and Lower)

Valve Offsets is the minimum amount of electrical signals sent to the valve which causes the hydraulic cylinderto move If the valve offset is too small the sensor will not reach On-Grade Likewise if the valve offset valueis too large the sensor will move too much and overshoot On-Grade

Run the Paver until the hydraulic oil is at normal operating temperature before setting the valve offsets Oncethey are set you should not need to readjust the valve offsets unless the Control Box is moved to a new paveror the hydraulic performance changes

Valve Offset Value Range (Raise and Lower) 1 - 999

Elevation Deadband

Elevation Deadband is the area of the Working Window that is On-Grade While the reference is within that areathe paverrsquos valves are idle (closed) Therefore the wider the Elevation Deadband (On-Grade area) the more areference can move up or down without a correction being initiated Once the signal from the reference is outof the deadband your control box drives the hydraulics to place the reference back in the center of thedeadband

Deadband Elevation Value Range 1ndash30 mm

Before setting the Slope Gain ensure the machines hydraulic flow control valves are adjusted forproper cylinder speed according to the manufacturers recommendations

Do not set slope gain at a higher value than the elevation gain on the other side of the paver A highervalue may cause the slope to be over reactive

Set the Valve Offsets before adjusting elevation and slope gains and averaging

The offset value on one side of the paver may differ from the offset value on the other side of thepaver You must verify the offset values before swapping boxes Use the ldquoLeftrdquo and ldquoRightrdquo labelsprovided

Never attempt to use Valve Offsets to compensate for a slower raise or lower speed of your hydraulicvalves as it causes undershooting or overshooting in Slope Mode and can adversely affect the qualityof the mat

Select the amount of Elevation Deadband carefully Too small of an Elevation Deadband causes thetow point cylinder to constantly hunt up and down while the sensor tries to find On-Grade Too largeof an Elevation Deadband does not allow the sensor to send grade corrections to the values causingunwanted variations in mat thickness

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1923

lope Deadband 16GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Slope Deadband

Slope Deadband defines the size of the on-grade area where no valve corrections are made

Deadband Slope Value Range 0025ndash075

The wider the Slope Deadband the greater the slope can vary without initiating a correction

For example if the operator is grading at a 20 slope and the Slope Deadband is set at 10 the system

reads on-grade anywhere from 195 slope to 205 slope The lower the percentage the tighter the SlopeDeadband

Once the slope signal is out of the Slope Deadband System Five drives the hydraulics back within the SlopeDeadband

Working Window Adjustment

Working Window Adjustment adjusts the working window of the sonic tracker (Figure 5)

Working Window Settings 0ndash500 Off

Default 020

The default setting is 020 which gives 020 ft (61 mm) above and below on-grade Setting the value to Offcompletely disables the working window and allows any target to be seen

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 2023

lope Working Window 17GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Figure 5 Sonic Tracker Working Window

Slope Working Window

Slope Working Window adjusts the working window of the Slope Sensor (Figure 6)

Slope Working Window Value Range 01 - 100 Off

Default 20

The default setting is 20 which gives 20 slope above and below ongrade Setting the value to Off completelydisables the working window

Out of Range

Ongrade

Flashing UpDown Arrow

Solid UpDown Arrow

20rsquo

20rsquo

20rsquo

20rsquo

Working

Window

(Adjustable)

ST-3 Sonic Tracker II

When using the Sonic Tracker II to follow a stringline curb or other elevated reference there is adanger of making an unwanted cut if the Trackerrsquos sonic cone moves away from the target This canoccur if the working window is either off or set as high as the distance between the reference and theground Setting the working window to the default value of 20 (020ft) prevents the automatic controlfrom making such a reaction due to a loss of the target

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 2123

martlink (Elevation and Slope) 18GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Figure 6 Slope Working Window

Smartlink (Elevation and Slope)

Smartlink allows the Control Box to send a percentage of the slopeelevation correction on one side of themachine to the Control Box on the other side of the machine preemptively raising or lowering that hydrauliccylinder to keep the machine at the correct grade Smartlink decreases the lag in correction that can occur onone side of the machine as the second Control Box begins moving the valve without having to wait for thesensor on the other side of the machine to detect and correct for a change in elevationslope

Smartlink Value Range 0 - 100

Default 0

Out of Range

Working Window (Adjustable)

Ongrade

20

20

Ongrade

20

20

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 2223

Warranty 19GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

bull bull bull bull bull bull

Warranty

Topcon laser and electronic positioning equipment are guaranteed against defective material and workmanshipunder normal use and application consistent with this Manual The equipment is guaranteed for the period indicatedon the warranty card accompanying the product starting from the date that the product is sold to the originalpurchaser by Topconrsquos Authorized Dealers1

During the warranty period Topcon will at its option repair or replace this product at no additional charge Repairparts and replacement products will be furnished on an exchange basis and will be either reconditioned or new Thislimited warranty does not include service to repair damage to the product resulting from an accident disastermisuses abuse or modification of the product

Warranty service may be obtained from an authorized Topcon warranty service dealer If this product is deliveredby mail purchaser agrees to insure the product or assume the risk of loss or damage in transit to prepay shippingcharges to the warranty service location and to use the original shipping container or equivalent A letter shouldaccompany the package furnishing a description of the problem andor defect

The purchaserrsquos sole remedy shall be replacement as provided above In no event shall Topcon be liable for anydamages or other claim including any claim for lost profits lost savings or other incidental or consequential damagesarising out of the use of or inability to use the product

1 The warranty against defects in a Topcon battery charger or cable is 90 days

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 2323

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 223

GC-35 Control BoxTechnical Reference Manual

Part Number 1001548-02

Rev A

copyCopyright Topcon Positioning Systems Inc

January 2014

All contents in this manual are copyrighted by Topcon Positioning Systems Inc All rights reserved

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 323

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 423

iPN 1001548-02

bull bull bull bull bull bull

Table of Contents

Preface iii

Terms and Conditions iii

Manual Conventions vIntroduction 1

Features 1

Powering the Control Box OnOff 2

Control Screen 2

Accessing the Technicianrsquos Menu 3

Technicianrsquos Menu 9

Configuration 10

Configuration Codes 10 Averaging 11

Valve Type 11

Proportional Current 11

Proportional Pulse Width Modulated 11

Solenoid 11

Danfoss 12

Valve Drive 12

Dither Amplitude 12Dither Frequency 12

Frequency 12

Max Current 12

Hour 13

External Auto 13

Auto Power (Paver Only) 13

Esup2 Reset 13

Lock Menu 14Lock Menu Settings 14

Elevation Gains (Raise and Lower) 14

Slope Gain 15

Valve Offsets (Raise and Lower) 15

Elevation Deadband 15

Slope Deadband 16

Working Window Adjustment 16

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 523

iiPN 1001548-02

Slope Working Window 18

Smartlink (Elevation and Slope) 18

Warranty 19

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 623

Preface iiGC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

bull bull bull bull bull bull

Preface

Thank you for purchasing this Topcon product The materials available in this Manual (the ldquoManualrdquo) have been preparedby Topcon Positioning Systems Inc (ldquoTPSrdquo) for owners of Topcon products and are designed to assist owners with theuse of the product and its use is subject to these terms and conditions (the ldquoTerms and Conditionsrdquo)

Terms and Conditions

Use

This product is designed to be used by a professional The user should have a good knowledge of the safe use of theproduct and implement the types of safety procedures recommended by the local government protection agency for bothprivate use and commercial job sites

Copyrights

All information contained in this Manual is the intellectual property of and copyrighted material of TPS All rights arereserved Do not use access copy store display create derivative works of sell modify publish distribute or allow anythird party access to any graphics content information or data in this Manual without TPSrsquo express written consent andmay only use such information for the care and operation of the product The information and data in this Manual are avaluable asset of TPS and are developed by the expenditure of considerable work time and money and are the result oforiginal selection coordination and arrangement by TPS

Trademarks

HiPer SRtrade TRUtrade Magnettrade Pocket-3Dtrade Topconreg and Topcon Positioning Systemstrade are trademarks or registeredtrademarks of TPS Windowsreg is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation The Bluetoothreg word mark and logosare owned by Bluetooth SIG Inc and any use of such marks by Topcon Positioning Systems Inc is used under licenseOther product and company names mentioned herein may be trademarks of their respective owners

Disclaimer of Warranty

EXCEPT FOR ANY WARRANTIES IN AN APPENDIX OR A WARRANTY CARD ACCOMPANYING THE PRODUCT THIS MANUAL AND THE PRODUCT ARE PROVIDED ldquoAS-ISrdquo THERE ARE NO OTHER WARRANTIES TPS DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIEDWARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR USE OR PURPOSE TPS AND ITS DISTRIBUTORSSHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR TECHNICAL OR EDITORIAL ERRORS OR OMISSIONS CONTAINED HEREIN NOR FORINCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM THE FURNISHING PERFORMANCE OR USE OF THIS

MATERIAL OR THE PRODUCT SUCH DISCLAIMED DAMAGES INCLUDE BUT ARE NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF TIME LOSSOR DESTRUCTION OF DATA LOSS OF PROFIT SAVINGS OR REVENUE OR LOSS OF THE PRODUCTrsquoS USE IN ADDITIONTPS IS NOT RESPONSIBLE OR LIABLE FOR DAMAGES OR COSTS INCURRED IN CONNECTION WITH OBTAININGSUBSTITUTE PRODUCTS OR SOFTWARE CLAIMS BY OTHERS INCONVENIENCE OR ANY OTHER COSTS IN ANY EVENTTPS SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES OR OTHERWISE TO YOU OR ANY OTHER PERSON OR ENTITY IN EXCESSOF THE PURCHASE PRICE FOR THE PRODUCT

Please read the terms and conditions carefully

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 723

erms and Conditions ivGC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

License Agreement

Use of any computer programs or software supplied by TPS or downloaded from a TPS website (the ldquoSoftwarerdquo) inconnection with the product constitutes acceptance of these Terms and Conditions in this Manual and an agreementto abide by these Terms and Conditions The user is granted a personal non-exclusive non-transferable license touse such Software under the terms stated herein and in any case only with a single product You may not assign ortransfer the Software or this license without the express written consent of TPS This license is effective untilterminated You may terminate the license at any time by destroying the Software and Manual TPS may terminatethe license if you fail to comply with any of the Terms or Conditions You agree to destroy the Software and manual

upon termination of the use of the product All ownership copyright and other intellectual property rights in and tothe Software belong to TPS If these license terms are not acceptable return any unused software and manual

Confidentiality

This Manual its contents and the Software (collectively the ldquoConfidential Informationrdquo) are the confidential andproprietary information of TPS You agree to treat TPSrsquo Confidential Information with a degree of care no less stringentthat the degree of care you would use in safeguarding your own most valuable trade secrets Nothing in this paragraphshall restrict you from disclosing Confidential Information to your employees as may be necessary or appropriate tooperate or care for the product Such employees must also keep the Confidentiality Information confidential In theevent you become legally compelled to disclose any of the Confidential Information you shall give TPS immediatenotice so that it may seek a protective order or other appropriate remedy

Website Other Statements

No statement contained at the TPS website (or any other website) or in any other advertisements or TPS literatureor made by an employee or independent contractor of TPS modifies these Terms and Conditions (including theSoftware license warranty and limitation of liability)

Safety

Improper use of the product can lead to injury to persons or property andor malfunction of the product The productshould only be repaired by authorized TPS warranty service centers Users should review and heed the safety warnings

in an Appendix

Miscellaneous

The above Terms and Conditions may be amended modified superseded or canceled at any time by TPS The aboveTerms and Conditions will be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of Californiawithout reference to conflict of laws

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 823

Manual Conventions vGC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Manual Conventions

This manual uses the following conventions

Convention Description Example

Bold Menu or drop-down menu item File Exit (Click the File menu and clickExit)

Name of a dialog box or screen From the Connection screen

Button or key commands Click Finish

Mono User supplied text or variable Type guest and click Enter

Italic Reference to another manual or help document Refer to the Topcon Reference Manual

Further information to note about system configuration maintenance or setup

Supplementary information that can have an adverse affect on system operation systemperformance data integrity measurements or personal safety

Notification that an action has the potential to result in system damage loss of data loss ofwarranty or personal injury

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 923

Introduction 1GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

bull bull bull bull bull bull

Introduction

The Technicians Menu contains additional system menu items not available to the operator (end user) in the GC-35 Control Box Performance Menu

These menu items offer the ability to override default settings of the P-32 system to improve system performancein certain situations These menu items are not however meant to be changed by the operator

The following sections describe the features of the GC-35 control box and explain how to access the TechnicianrsquosMenu select a menu item save the new value and exit the Technicianrsquos Menu

Features

Figure 1 GC-35 Control Box

Access to the Technicianrsquos Menu is intended for and should be limited to Topcon qualified dealerand field service technicians Any changes to the factory default settings without a thoroughunderstanding to their effects on the P-32 system may cause adverse consequences to systemaccuracy and operation

Auto Indicator LED

Auto Button

Survey Button

Elevation Indicator

LED (Green)

Slope Indicator

LED (Yellow)

SlopeElevation

Button

Jog UpDown

Buttons

LCD

Light Sensor

Power OnOff

Button

Grade Adjustment

Knob

Grade Adjustment

Arrows

Menu Selection

Buttons

Grade Indicator

LEDs

USB Port

USB Cap

(Removed)

Jaw Mount

Power Connector

Sonic Tracker or Slope Sensor

Connectors

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1023

owering the Control Box OnOff 2GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Powering the Control Box OnOff

Figure 2 Power OnOff

Control ScreenThe Control Screen displays when you power on the control box It is your interface with the components ofthe P-32 system The Control Screen changes depending on how you have configured the Control Box and theP-32 system

The illustration below shows an example of a Control Box set up to display information from a secondary ControlBox set up for Slope Control

Figure 3 Control Screen

Power OnOff

Button

Startup Screen Shutdown Screen

GC-35

Shutting Down

con1047297g 21

Elevation Set

Point Value

Actual Elevation

Sensor Reading

Slope Set Point Value

PositiveNegative

Slope Indicator Icon

Actual Slope

Sensor Reading

MenuSet

Button Function

Display Area

Elevation Icon

Units (ftincm)

ST-3 SurfaceStringline Mode Icon

Display Slope Box

Auto Icon

Slope Icon

Primary Control Box Display Area

Secondary Control Box

Display Area

Cross Communication

On-Grade Icon

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1123

ccessing the Technicianrsquos Menu 3GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Accessing the Technicianrsquos Menu

1 From the Control Screen press the MenuSet button

2 Rotate the Grade Adjustment Knob to scroll through the menu selections displayed on the screen

3 Select Tech Menu and press and hold the Enter button for three (3) seconds to enter the

Technicianrsquos Menu

Figure 4 Accessing the Technicianrsquos Menu

Press MenuSet Button Turn Grade Adjustment Knob Press and Hold

Enter Button for 3 Seconds

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1223

Technicianrsquos Menu 9GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

bull bull bull bull bull bull

Technicianrsquos Menu

This chapter describes the Technicianrsquos Menu items and their default factory settings

Table 1 lists the available menus

Table 1 Technicianrsquos Menu Settings

Menu Item Range Default Factory Setting

Configuration External 0ndash31 Custom External

Averaging 1 ndash 100 50

Valve Type Solenoid ProportionalDanfoss Pulse WidthModulated

Proportional

Valve Drive Sink Source Sink

Dither Amplitude 0ndash15 4

Dither Frequency 0ndash105 42

Frequency 1ndash13Hz

225ndash1950Hz

5Hz

Max Current 067ndash48 Amps 175 Amps

Hour Read only Hours 00

Hours Auto 00

External Auto On Off Invert Off

Auto Power Up (Paver only) On Off On

Esup2 Reset Cancel Reset Cancel

Lock Menu Level 1 - Unlocked

Level 2 - Moderate

Level 3 - Restricted

Level 1 - Unlocked

Elevation Gains Raise 1 ndash 200 Raise 25

Lower 1 ndash 200 Lower 25

Slope Gain 1 ndash 100 25

Valve Offsets Raise 1 ndash 999 Raise 135

Lower 1 ndash 999 Lower 135

Elevation Deadband 1 ndash 30 mm 3 mm

Slope Deadband 0025 ndash 075 0075

Working Window 0ndash500 Off 020 ft

Slope Working Window 01-100 20

Smartlink Slope 0 - 100 Slope 0

Elevation 0 - 100 Elevation 0

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1323

onfiguration 10GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Configuration

This setting selects a valve drive configuration and has up to 32 preprogrammed configurations to select from You may also create a custom configuration

Configuration Value Range External 0-31 Custom

Default External

bull External ndash Upon power up the control box looks for an external configuration resistor between pins Land K of the 11 pin bulkhead connector and defaults to the listed configuration table for valve control

The configuration number displays on the control box LCD when the box is turned onbull Value between 0-31 ndash The control box defaults to the valve control parameters for this number listed inthe configuration chart (see Table 2 on page 10) The configuration number displays on the control boxLCD when the box is turned on

bull Custom ndash Create a custom valve control configuration by setting the Valve Type Current DirectionCurrent Limit Frequency (for PWM modes and Solenoid) Dither Amplitude (except Solenoid mode) andDither Frequency (except Solenoid mode)

Configuration Codes

Table 2 lists available configurations

Table 2 Configuration Codes

ConfigResistor

(ohms)

Drive Type Current Direction Dither Amplitude Dither Freq Freq Hz Current Limit

0 0 Sol Sink None None Adj None

1 77

2 160

3 249

4 341

5 441 Sol Source None None Adj None

6 560 Sol Source None None Adj None

7 670

8 800 Sol Source None None Adj None

9 940 Sol Source None None Adj None10 1100 Sol Sink None None Adj None

11 1260 Sol Source None None Adj

12 1445

14 1890

15 2140 Pro Cur Source 6 42 NA 175A

17 2760 Sol Sink None None Adj None

18 3140 Sol Sink None None Adj None

19 3583 Sol Source None None Adj None

20 4104 Sol Sink None None Adj None

21 4725 Sol Sink None None Adj None

22 5480 Sol

23 6414

26 11310 Sol Source None None Adj None

27 14440

28 19440

29 28670

30 51500 Pro Cur Source 12 42 NA 175A

31 open Pro Cur Sink 6 42 NA 175A

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1423

veraging 11GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Averaging

Averaging changes the amount of dampening or filtering applied to the laser receiver or elevation sensormeasurements Averaging can be thought of as the time period over which a running average of the elevationmeasurement is calculated

Averaging Value Range 1ndash100

Default 50

A lower value averages fewer elevation measurements allowing the system to react more quickly to grade

changes

A larger value averages more elevation measurements making the system less reactive to fluctuations in gradesuch as with laser ldquobeam bouncerdquo on windy days

Valve Type

Valve Type allows you to select the type of valves used on your machine

Valve Type Value Range Solenoid Servo Proportional Danfoss Pulse PWMDefault Proportional

The following sections describe each of these valve types

Proportional Current

Proportional Current provides a current regulated proportional output and is the preferred setting forproportional valves

A percentage of the total current setting is calculated based on the gain setting and given grade correctionProportional Current control applies full machine voltage to the valve coil until the desired current is reachedthen the voltage is turned off When the current drops below the desired value the process is repeated

Proportional Pulse Width Modulated

Proportional Pulse Width Modulated provides a pulse width regulated proportional output

A percentage of the total duty cycle is calculated based on the gain setting and the given grade correction PulseWidth Modulation cycles the output voltage on and off at the desired duty cycle

Solenoid

Solenoid operates the same as PWM mode except set up specifically for the lower frequency solenoid valves

Danfoss

Danfoss provides a proportional voltage output to drive the specific requirements of the Danfoss brand ofproportional valves In this mode switched power (Vsw) and ground connect to the Danfoss valve through thevalve cable and the Raise output pin of the control box controls the reference signal to the valve In a neutral(no grade) correction output the reference signal is held at half of the switched voltage For example if a 12volt system produced 13 volts on the Vsw line 65 volts are held on the reference output for a no correctionsignal

bull For a raise correction signal the control box increases the reference voltage from 65 to a maximum of975 V

Averaging does not affect slope control

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1523

alve Drive 12GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

bull For a lower output signal the control box decreases the reference voltage to a minimum of 325 V

Valve Drive

Valve Drive selects the current direction of the valves on the machine

Valve Drive Value Range Sink Source

Select Sink if the valve has a permanent positive connection and needs a switched negative connection (thecontrol box sinks current)

Select Source if the valve has a permanent ground (negative) connection and needs a switched positiveconnection (the control box sources current)

Dither Amplitude

Dither Amplitude allows you to select the amount of dither to apply to the valve

Dither is a continuous low frequency ldquopulserdquo applied to the valve drive signal for proportional valves to keep thevalversquos spool from sticking

Dither Amplitude Value Range 0ndash15

Dither Amplitude is a percentage of full current for the Proportional Current valve type or duty cycle for thePWM valve type Dither does not apply for Solenoid Danfoss or Servo valve types

Dither Frequency

Dither Frequency adjusts the frequency of the dither in cycles per second

Dither Frequency Value Range 0ndash105 Hz

Frequency

Frequency adjusts the number of pulses sent to control valves in one secondFrequency Value Range 1ndash13 Hz 225ndash1950 Hz

The frequency value is adjustable from 1 to 13 Hz for Solenoid valves On Pulse Width Modulated mode valvesthe range is 225 to 1950 Hz

Max Current

Max Current adjusts the maximum valve drive current that the control box outputs when using ProportionalCurrent valve output mode and the over-current trip level for other valve types

Current Limit Value Range 067ndash48 Amps

If a Danfoss valve sees a reference voltage greater than 75 of Vsw or below 25 of Vsw the valvedefaults to an ldquoerrorrdquo state and the valve is held in the neutral position

Frequency does not apply for Proportional Current and Danfoss valve types

Changing the Frequency has an effect on the Offset Check the Offset after changing theFrequency

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1623

our 13GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Hour

Hour displays the amount of hours the control box has been operating and the amount of hours the control boxhas been operating in Automatic

Hour Settings No settings (read only)

External Auto

External Auto disables or enables an external automanual switch

External Auto Settings OnOffInvert

If On is selected the system requires both an external AM switch and activation of the Control Boxrsquos Autobutton to switch the system in and out of Automatic control Activate the external AM switch by connectingpin E of the 11 PIN bulkhead to ground

If you select Invert connecting pin E to ground takes the system out of Automatic control Automatic controlactivates only when pin E is connected to power such as when connecting to an in-motion switch

Auto Power (Paver Only)

The Auto Power setting allows the system to automatically power up to the last used mode

Auto Power Settings OnOff

When the Auto Power setting is On the system powers up in the last mode seen before power down (Auto orManual) For example the paver is in automatic control is shut down and then powered up once more Thepaver is now ready to pave in Auto

When the Auto Power setting is Off the operator must press the Auto button to return to Auto after a powerdown

Esup2 Reset

Esup2 Reset reconfigures the system to factory settings

Esup2 Reset Settings Range CancelReset

To reset all settings in the Performance Menu and the Technician Menu to factory defaults select Reset and press and hold the Enter button for three (3) seconds

To cancel and return to the previous screen select Cancel

Lock Menu

The Lock-Out Setting allows certain Performance Settings in the Performance Menu to be made inaccessibleto the operator (see ldquoPaver Lock Menu Settingsrdquo on page 14)

If the Auto Power setting is On the machine powers up in Auto any time it was shut down in AutoOnly use Auto Power On in asphalt paver applications

Setting Auto Power to On for a machine other than asphalt pavers is not recommended Seriousinjury to operators or bystanders from unexpected machine movement could result

If you select Reset the Control Box reverts your custom Control Box settings back to their factorydefault values

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1723

levation Gains (Raise and Lower) 14GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Lock-Out Value Range Level 1 - Unlocked Level2 - Moderate Level 3 - Restricted

bull Level 1 ndash all Performance Menu items are accessible to the operator

bull Level 2ndash some items no longer appear in the Performance Menu and are only accessible in theTechnicianrsquos Menu

bull Level 3 ndash additional items no longer appear in the Performance Menu and are only accessible in theTechnicianrsquos Menu

Lock Menu Settings

Table 3 lists the settings that can be locked out (made unavailable)

Elevation Gains (Raise and Lower)

Elevation Gains determines the speed at which your Topcon P-32 System allows the tow point cylinders to adjustto a change in elevation For faster hydraulic response increase the gain value For slower hydraulic responsedecrease the gain value

The objective is to set the gain so the screed reacts to the change in grade quickly but without ldquoovershootingrdquothe new elevation

Gain Elevation Value Range 1-200

Table 3 Paver Lock Menu Settings

Performance Menu Item Level 1 - Unlocked Level 2 - Moderate Level 3 - Restricted

1 Elevation Gains Available Available Locked

2 Slope Gain Available Available Locked

3 Valve Offsets Available Available Locked

4 Elevation Deadband Available Locked Locked

5 Slope Deadband Available Locked Locked

6 Averaging Available Locked Locked

7 Machine Type Available Available Available

8 Display Available Available Available

9 Units Available Available Available

10 System Info Available Available Available

11 Sonic Tracker 3 Available Available Available

12 Slope Resolution Available Available Available

13 Slope Cal Block Available Available Locked

14 Tech Menu Available Available Available

Before setting the Elevation Gain make sure the machines hydraulic flow controls valves are adjustedfor proper cylinder speed according to the manufacturers recommendations

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1823

lope Gain 15GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Slope Gain

This setting determines the speed at which your Topcon P-32 System allows the tow point cylinders to adjustto a change in slope For faster hydraulic response increase the gain value For slower hydraulic responsedecrease the gain value

The objective is to set the gain so the screed reacts to the change in grade quickly but without ldquoovershootingrdquoOn-Grade Slope Gain should not be set at a higher value than the Elevation Gain on the other side of the paver

Gain Elevation Value Range 1-100

Valve Offsets (Raise and Lower)

Valve Offsets is the minimum amount of electrical signals sent to the valve which causes the hydraulic cylinderto move If the valve offset is too small the sensor will not reach On-Grade Likewise if the valve offset valueis too large the sensor will move too much and overshoot On-Grade

Run the Paver until the hydraulic oil is at normal operating temperature before setting the valve offsets Oncethey are set you should not need to readjust the valve offsets unless the Control Box is moved to a new paveror the hydraulic performance changes

Valve Offset Value Range (Raise and Lower) 1 - 999

Elevation Deadband

Elevation Deadband is the area of the Working Window that is On-Grade While the reference is within that areathe paverrsquos valves are idle (closed) Therefore the wider the Elevation Deadband (On-Grade area) the more areference can move up or down without a correction being initiated Once the signal from the reference is outof the deadband your control box drives the hydraulics to place the reference back in the center of thedeadband

Deadband Elevation Value Range 1ndash30 mm

Before setting the Slope Gain ensure the machines hydraulic flow control valves are adjusted forproper cylinder speed according to the manufacturers recommendations

Do not set slope gain at a higher value than the elevation gain on the other side of the paver A highervalue may cause the slope to be over reactive

Set the Valve Offsets before adjusting elevation and slope gains and averaging

The offset value on one side of the paver may differ from the offset value on the other side of thepaver You must verify the offset values before swapping boxes Use the ldquoLeftrdquo and ldquoRightrdquo labelsprovided

Never attempt to use Valve Offsets to compensate for a slower raise or lower speed of your hydraulicvalves as it causes undershooting or overshooting in Slope Mode and can adversely affect the qualityof the mat

Select the amount of Elevation Deadband carefully Too small of an Elevation Deadband causes thetow point cylinder to constantly hunt up and down while the sensor tries to find On-Grade Too largeof an Elevation Deadband does not allow the sensor to send grade corrections to the values causingunwanted variations in mat thickness

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1923

lope Deadband 16GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Slope Deadband

Slope Deadband defines the size of the on-grade area where no valve corrections are made

Deadband Slope Value Range 0025ndash075

The wider the Slope Deadband the greater the slope can vary without initiating a correction

For example if the operator is grading at a 20 slope and the Slope Deadband is set at 10 the system

reads on-grade anywhere from 195 slope to 205 slope The lower the percentage the tighter the SlopeDeadband

Once the slope signal is out of the Slope Deadband System Five drives the hydraulics back within the SlopeDeadband

Working Window Adjustment

Working Window Adjustment adjusts the working window of the sonic tracker (Figure 5)

Working Window Settings 0ndash500 Off

Default 020

The default setting is 020 which gives 020 ft (61 mm) above and below on-grade Setting the value to Offcompletely disables the working window and allows any target to be seen

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 2023

lope Working Window 17GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Figure 5 Sonic Tracker Working Window

Slope Working Window

Slope Working Window adjusts the working window of the Slope Sensor (Figure 6)

Slope Working Window Value Range 01 - 100 Off

Default 20

The default setting is 20 which gives 20 slope above and below ongrade Setting the value to Off completelydisables the working window

Out of Range

Ongrade

Flashing UpDown Arrow

Solid UpDown Arrow

20rsquo

20rsquo

20rsquo

20rsquo

Working

Window

(Adjustable)

ST-3 Sonic Tracker II

When using the Sonic Tracker II to follow a stringline curb or other elevated reference there is adanger of making an unwanted cut if the Trackerrsquos sonic cone moves away from the target This canoccur if the working window is either off or set as high as the distance between the reference and theground Setting the working window to the default value of 20 (020ft) prevents the automatic controlfrom making such a reaction due to a loss of the target

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 2123

martlink (Elevation and Slope) 18GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Figure 6 Slope Working Window

Smartlink (Elevation and Slope)

Smartlink allows the Control Box to send a percentage of the slopeelevation correction on one side of themachine to the Control Box on the other side of the machine preemptively raising or lowering that hydrauliccylinder to keep the machine at the correct grade Smartlink decreases the lag in correction that can occur onone side of the machine as the second Control Box begins moving the valve without having to wait for thesensor on the other side of the machine to detect and correct for a change in elevationslope

Smartlink Value Range 0 - 100

Default 0

Out of Range

Working Window (Adjustable)

Ongrade

20

20

Ongrade

20

20

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 2223

Warranty 19GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

bull bull bull bull bull bull

Warranty

Topcon laser and electronic positioning equipment are guaranteed against defective material and workmanshipunder normal use and application consistent with this Manual The equipment is guaranteed for the period indicatedon the warranty card accompanying the product starting from the date that the product is sold to the originalpurchaser by Topconrsquos Authorized Dealers1

During the warranty period Topcon will at its option repair or replace this product at no additional charge Repairparts and replacement products will be furnished on an exchange basis and will be either reconditioned or new Thislimited warranty does not include service to repair damage to the product resulting from an accident disastermisuses abuse or modification of the product

Warranty service may be obtained from an authorized Topcon warranty service dealer If this product is deliveredby mail purchaser agrees to insure the product or assume the risk of loss or damage in transit to prepay shippingcharges to the warranty service location and to use the original shipping container or equivalent A letter shouldaccompany the package furnishing a description of the problem andor defect

The purchaserrsquos sole remedy shall be replacement as provided above In no event shall Topcon be liable for anydamages or other claim including any claim for lost profits lost savings or other incidental or consequential damagesarising out of the use of or inability to use the product

1 The warranty against defects in a Topcon battery charger or cable is 90 days

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 2323

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 323

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 423

iPN 1001548-02

bull bull bull bull bull bull

Table of Contents

Preface iii

Terms and Conditions iii

Manual Conventions vIntroduction 1

Features 1

Powering the Control Box OnOff 2

Control Screen 2

Accessing the Technicianrsquos Menu 3

Technicianrsquos Menu 9

Configuration 10

Configuration Codes 10 Averaging 11

Valve Type 11

Proportional Current 11

Proportional Pulse Width Modulated 11

Solenoid 11

Danfoss 12

Valve Drive 12

Dither Amplitude 12Dither Frequency 12

Frequency 12

Max Current 12

Hour 13

External Auto 13

Auto Power (Paver Only) 13

Esup2 Reset 13

Lock Menu 14Lock Menu Settings 14

Elevation Gains (Raise and Lower) 14

Slope Gain 15

Valve Offsets (Raise and Lower) 15

Elevation Deadband 15

Slope Deadband 16

Working Window Adjustment 16

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 523

iiPN 1001548-02

Slope Working Window 18

Smartlink (Elevation and Slope) 18

Warranty 19

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 623

Preface iiGC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

bull bull bull bull bull bull

Preface

Thank you for purchasing this Topcon product The materials available in this Manual (the ldquoManualrdquo) have been preparedby Topcon Positioning Systems Inc (ldquoTPSrdquo) for owners of Topcon products and are designed to assist owners with theuse of the product and its use is subject to these terms and conditions (the ldquoTerms and Conditionsrdquo)

Terms and Conditions

Use

This product is designed to be used by a professional The user should have a good knowledge of the safe use of theproduct and implement the types of safety procedures recommended by the local government protection agency for bothprivate use and commercial job sites

Copyrights

All information contained in this Manual is the intellectual property of and copyrighted material of TPS All rights arereserved Do not use access copy store display create derivative works of sell modify publish distribute or allow anythird party access to any graphics content information or data in this Manual without TPSrsquo express written consent andmay only use such information for the care and operation of the product The information and data in this Manual are avaluable asset of TPS and are developed by the expenditure of considerable work time and money and are the result oforiginal selection coordination and arrangement by TPS

Trademarks

HiPer SRtrade TRUtrade Magnettrade Pocket-3Dtrade Topconreg and Topcon Positioning Systemstrade are trademarks or registeredtrademarks of TPS Windowsreg is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation The Bluetoothreg word mark and logosare owned by Bluetooth SIG Inc and any use of such marks by Topcon Positioning Systems Inc is used under licenseOther product and company names mentioned herein may be trademarks of their respective owners

Disclaimer of Warranty

EXCEPT FOR ANY WARRANTIES IN AN APPENDIX OR A WARRANTY CARD ACCOMPANYING THE PRODUCT THIS MANUAL AND THE PRODUCT ARE PROVIDED ldquoAS-ISrdquo THERE ARE NO OTHER WARRANTIES TPS DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIEDWARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR USE OR PURPOSE TPS AND ITS DISTRIBUTORSSHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR TECHNICAL OR EDITORIAL ERRORS OR OMISSIONS CONTAINED HEREIN NOR FORINCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM THE FURNISHING PERFORMANCE OR USE OF THIS

MATERIAL OR THE PRODUCT SUCH DISCLAIMED DAMAGES INCLUDE BUT ARE NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF TIME LOSSOR DESTRUCTION OF DATA LOSS OF PROFIT SAVINGS OR REVENUE OR LOSS OF THE PRODUCTrsquoS USE IN ADDITIONTPS IS NOT RESPONSIBLE OR LIABLE FOR DAMAGES OR COSTS INCURRED IN CONNECTION WITH OBTAININGSUBSTITUTE PRODUCTS OR SOFTWARE CLAIMS BY OTHERS INCONVENIENCE OR ANY OTHER COSTS IN ANY EVENTTPS SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES OR OTHERWISE TO YOU OR ANY OTHER PERSON OR ENTITY IN EXCESSOF THE PURCHASE PRICE FOR THE PRODUCT

Please read the terms and conditions carefully

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 723

erms and Conditions ivGC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

License Agreement

Use of any computer programs or software supplied by TPS or downloaded from a TPS website (the ldquoSoftwarerdquo) inconnection with the product constitutes acceptance of these Terms and Conditions in this Manual and an agreementto abide by these Terms and Conditions The user is granted a personal non-exclusive non-transferable license touse such Software under the terms stated herein and in any case only with a single product You may not assign ortransfer the Software or this license without the express written consent of TPS This license is effective untilterminated You may terminate the license at any time by destroying the Software and Manual TPS may terminatethe license if you fail to comply with any of the Terms or Conditions You agree to destroy the Software and manual

upon termination of the use of the product All ownership copyright and other intellectual property rights in and tothe Software belong to TPS If these license terms are not acceptable return any unused software and manual

Confidentiality

This Manual its contents and the Software (collectively the ldquoConfidential Informationrdquo) are the confidential andproprietary information of TPS You agree to treat TPSrsquo Confidential Information with a degree of care no less stringentthat the degree of care you would use in safeguarding your own most valuable trade secrets Nothing in this paragraphshall restrict you from disclosing Confidential Information to your employees as may be necessary or appropriate tooperate or care for the product Such employees must also keep the Confidentiality Information confidential In theevent you become legally compelled to disclose any of the Confidential Information you shall give TPS immediatenotice so that it may seek a protective order or other appropriate remedy

Website Other Statements

No statement contained at the TPS website (or any other website) or in any other advertisements or TPS literatureor made by an employee or independent contractor of TPS modifies these Terms and Conditions (including theSoftware license warranty and limitation of liability)

Safety

Improper use of the product can lead to injury to persons or property andor malfunction of the product The productshould only be repaired by authorized TPS warranty service centers Users should review and heed the safety warnings

in an Appendix

Miscellaneous

The above Terms and Conditions may be amended modified superseded or canceled at any time by TPS The aboveTerms and Conditions will be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of Californiawithout reference to conflict of laws

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 823

Manual Conventions vGC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Manual Conventions

This manual uses the following conventions

Convention Description Example

Bold Menu or drop-down menu item File Exit (Click the File menu and clickExit)

Name of a dialog box or screen From the Connection screen

Button or key commands Click Finish

Mono User supplied text or variable Type guest and click Enter

Italic Reference to another manual or help document Refer to the Topcon Reference Manual

Further information to note about system configuration maintenance or setup

Supplementary information that can have an adverse affect on system operation systemperformance data integrity measurements or personal safety

Notification that an action has the potential to result in system damage loss of data loss ofwarranty or personal injury

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 923

Introduction 1GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

bull bull bull bull bull bull

Introduction

The Technicians Menu contains additional system menu items not available to the operator (end user) in the GC-35 Control Box Performance Menu

These menu items offer the ability to override default settings of the P-32 system to improve system performancein certain situations These menu items are not however meant to be changed by the operator

The following sections describe the features of the GC-35 control box and explain how to access the TechnicianrsquosMenu select a menu item save the new value and exit the Technicianrsquos Menu

Features

Figure 1 GC-35 Control Box

Access to the Technicianrsquos Menu is intended for and should be limited to Topcon qualified dealerand field service technicians Any changes to the factory default settings without a thoroughunderstanding to their effects on the P-32 system may cause adverse consequences to systemaccuracy and operation

Auto Indicator LED

Auto Button

Survey Button

Elevation Indicator

LED (Green)

Slope Indicator

LED (Yellow)

SlopeElevation

Button

Jog UpDown

Buttons

LCD

Light Sensor

Power OnOff

Button

Grade Adjustment

Knob

Grade Adjustment

Arrows

Menu Selection

Buttons

Grade Indicator

LEDs

USB Port

USB Cap

(Removed)

Jaw Mount

Power Connector

Sonic Tracker or Slope Sensor

Connectors

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1023

owering the Control Box OnOff 2GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Powering the Control Box OnOff

Figure 2 Power OnOff

Control ScreenThe Control Screen displays when you power on the control box It is your interface with the components ofthe P-32 system The Control Screen changes depending on how you have configured the Control Box and theP-32 system

The illustration below shows an example of a Control Box set up to display information from a secondary ControlBox set up for Slope Control

Figure 3 Control Screen

Power OnOff

Button

Startup Screen Shutdown Screen

GC-35

Shutting Down

con1047297g 21

Elevation Set

Point Value

Actual Elevation

Sensor Reading

Slope Set Point Value

PositiveNegative

Slope Indicator Icon

Actual Slope

Sensor Reading

MenuSet

Button Function

Display Area

Elevation Icon

Units (ftincm)

ST-3 SurfaceStringline Mode Icon

Display Slope Box

Auto Icon

Slope Icon

Primary Control Box Display Area

Secondary Control Box

Display Area

Cross Communication

On-Grade Icon

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1123

ccessing the Technicianrsquos Menu 3GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Accessing the Technicianrsquos Menu

1 From the Control Screen press the MenuSet button

2 Rotate the Grade Adjustment Knob to scroll through the menu selections displayed on the screen

3 Select Tech Menu and press and hold the Enter button for three (3) seconds to enter the

Technicianrsquos Menu

Figure 4 Accessing the Technicianrsquos Menu

Press MenuSet Button Turn Grade Adjustment Knob Press and Hold

Enter Button for 3 Seconds

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1223

Technicianrsquos Menu 9GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

bull bull bull bull bull bull

Technicianrsquos Menu

This chapter describes the Technicianrsquos Menu items and their default factory settings

Table 1 lists the available menus

Table 1 Technicianrsquos Menu Settings

Menu Item Range Default Factory Setting

Configuration External 0ndash31 Custom External

Averaging 1 ndash 100 50

Valve Type Solenoid ProportionalDanfoss Pulse WidthModulated

Proportional

Valve Drive Sink Source Sink

Dither Amplitude 0ndash15 4

Dither Frequency 0ndash105 42

Frequency 1ndash13Hz

225ndash1950Hz

5Hz

Max Current 067ndash48 Amps 175 Amps

Hour Read only Hours 00

Hours Auto 00

External Auto On Off Invert Off

Auto Power Up (Paver only) On Off On

Esup2 Reset Cancel Reset Cancel

Lock Menu Level 1 - Unlocked

Level 2 - Moderate

Level 3 - Restricted

Level 1 - Unlocked

Elevation Gains Raise 1 ndash 200 Raise 25

Lower 1 ndash 200 Lower 25

Slope Gain 1 ndash 100 25

Valve Offsets Raise 1 ndash 999 Raise 135

Lower 1 ndash 999 Lower 135

Elevation Deadband 1 ndash 30 mm 3 mm

Slope Deadband 0025 ndash 075 0075

Working Window 0ndash500 Off 020 ft

Slope Working Window 01-100 20

Smartlink Slope 0 - 100 Slope 0

Elevation 0 - 100 Elevation 0

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1323

onfiguration 10GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Configuration

This setting selects a valve drive configuration and has up to 32 preprogrammed configurations to select from You may also create a custom configuration

Configuration Value Range External 0-31 Custom

Default External

bull External ndash Upon power up the control box looks for an external configuration resistor between pins Land K of the 11 pin bulkhead connector and defaults to the listed configuration table for valve control

The configuration number displays on the control box LCD when the box is turned onbull Value between 0-31 ndash The control box defaults to the valve control parameters for this number listed inthe configuration chart (see Table 2 on page 10) The configuration number displays on the control boxLCD when the box is turned on

bull Custom ndash Create a custom valve control configuration by setting the Valve Type Current DirectionCurrent Limit Frequency (for PWM modes and Solenoid) Dither Amplitude (except Solenoid mode) andDither Frequency (except Solenoid mode)

Configuration Codes

Table 2 lists available configurations

Table 2 Configuration Codes

ConfigResistor

(ohms)

Drive Type Current Direction Dither Amplitude Dither Freq Freq Hz Current Limit

0 0 Sol Sink None None Adj None

1 77

2 160

3 249

4 341

5 441 Sol Source None None Adj None

6 560 Sol Source None None Adj None

7 670

8 800 Sol Source None None Adj None

9 940 Sol Source None None Adj None10 1100 Sol Sink None None Adj None

11 1260 Sol Source None None Adj

12 1445

14 1890

15 2140 Pro Cur Source 6 42 NA 175A

17 2760 Sol Sink None None Adj None

18 3140 Sol Sink None None Adj None

19 3583 Sol Source None None Adj None

20 4104 Sol Sink None None Adj None

21 4725 Sol Sink None None Adj None

22 5480 Sol

23 6414

26 11310 Sol Source None None Adj None

27 14440

28 19440

29 28670

30 51500 Pro Cur Source 12 42 NA 175A

31 open Pro Cur Sink 6 42 NA 175A

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1423

veraging 11GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Averaging

Averaging changes the amount of dampening or filtering applied to the laser receiver or elevation sensormeasurements Averaging can be thought of as the time period over which a running average of the elevationmeasurement is calculated

Averaging Value Range 1ndash100

Default 50

A lower value averages fewer elevation measurements allowing the system to react more quickly to grade

changes

A larger value averages more elevation measurements making the system less reactive to fluctuations in gradesuch as with laser ldquobeam bouncerdquo on windy days

Valve Type

Valve Type allows you to select the type of valves used on your machine

Valve Type Value Range Solenoid Servo Proportional Danfoss Pulse PWMDefault Proportional

The following sections describe each of these valve types

Proportional Current

Proportional Current provides a current regulated proportional output and is the preferred setting forproportional valves

A percentage of the total current setting is calculated based on the gain setting and given grade correctionProportional Current control applies full machine voltage to the valve coil until the desired current is reachedthen the voltage is turned off When the current drops below the desired value the process is repeated

Proportional Pulse Width Modulated

Proportional Pulse Width Modulated provides a pulse width regulated proportional output

A percentage of the total duty cycle is calculated based on the gain setting and the given grade correction PulseWidth Modulation cycles the output voltage on and off at the desired duty cycle

Solenoid

Solenoid operates the same as PWM mode except set up specifically for the lower frequency solenoid valves

Danfoss

Danfoss provides a proportional voltage output to drive the specific requirements of the Danfoss brand ofproportional valves In this mode switched power (Vsw) and ground connect to the Danfoss valve through thevalve cable and the Raise output pin of the control box controls the reference signal to the valve In a neutral(no grade) correction output the reference signal is held at half of the switched voltage For example if a 12volt system produced 13 volts on the Vsw line 65 volts are held on the reference output for a no correctionsignal

bull For a raise correction signal the control box increases the reference voltage from 65 to a maximum of975 V

Averaging does not affect slope control

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1523

alve Drive 12GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

bull For a lower output signal the control box decreases the reference voltage to a minimum of 325 V

Valve Drive

Valve Drive selects the current direction of the valves on the machine

Valve Drive Value Range Sink Source

Select Sink if the valve has a permanent positive connection and needs a switched negative connection (thecontrol box sinks current)

Select Source if the valve has a permanent ground (negative) connection and needs a switched positiveconnection (the control box sources current)

Dither Amplitude

Dither Amplitude allows you to select the amount of dither to apply to the valve

Dither is a continuous low frequency ldquopulserdquo applied to the valve drive signal for proportional valves to keep thevalversquos spool from sticking

Dither Amplitude Value Range 0ndash15

Dither Amplitude is a percentage of full current for the Proportional Current valve type or duty cycle for thePWM valve type Dither does not apply for Solenoid Danfoss or Servo valve types

Dither Frequency

Dither Frequency adjusts the frequency of the dither in cycles per second

Dither Frequency Value Range 0ndash105 Hz

Frequency

Frequency adjusts the number of pulses sent to control valves in one secondFrequency Value Range 1ndash13 Hz 225ndash1950 Hz

The frequency value is adjustable from 1 to 13 Hz for Solenoid valves On Pulse Width Modulated mode valvesthe range is 225 to 1950 Hz

Max Current

Max Current adjusts the maximum valve drive current that the control box outputs when using ProportionalCurrent valve output mode and the over-current trip level for other valve types

Current Limit Value Range 067ndash48 Amps

If a Danfoss valve sees a reference voltage greater than 75 of Vsw or below 25 of Vsw the valvedefaults to an ldquoerrorrdquo state and the valve is held in the neutral position

Frequency does not apply for Proportional Current and Danfoss valve types

Changing the Frequency has an effect on the Offset Check the Offset after changing theFrequency

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1623

our 13GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Hour

Hour displays the amount of hours the control box has been operating and the amount of hours the control boxhas been operating in Automatic

Hour Settings No settings (read only)

External Auto

External Auto disables or enables an external automanual switch

External Auto Settings OnOffInvert

If On is selected the system requires both an external AM switch and activation of the Control Boxrsquos Autobutton to switch the system in and out of Automatic control Activate the external AM switch by connectingpin E of the 11 PIN bulkhead to ground

If you select Invert connecting pin E to ground takes the system out of Automatic control Automatic controlactivates only when pin E is connected to power such as when connecting to an in-motion switch

Auto Power (Paver Only)

The Auto Power setting allows the system to automatically power up to the last used mode

Auto Power Settings OnOff

When the Auto Power setting is On the system powers up in the last mode seen before power down (Auto orManual) For example the paver is in automatic control is shut down and then powered up once more Thepaver is now ready to pave in Auto

When the Auto Power setting is Off the operator must press the Auto button to return to Auto after a powerdown

Esup2 Reset

Esup2 Reset reconfigures the system to factory settings

Esup2 Reset Settings Range CancelReset

To reset all settings in the Performance Menu and the Technician Menu to factory defaults select Reset and press and hold the Enter button for three (3) seconds

To cancel and return to the previous screen select Cancel

Lock Menu

The Lock-Out Setting allows certain Performance Settings in the Performance Menu to be made inaccessibleto the operator (see ldquoPaver Lock Menu Settingsrdquo on page 14)

If the Auto Power setting is On the machine powers up in Auto any time it was shut down in AutoOnly use Auto Power On in asphalt paver applications

Setting Auto Power to On for a machine other than asphalt pavers is not recommended Seriousinjury to operators or bystanders from unexpected machine movement could result

If you select Reset the Control Box reverts your custom Control Box settings back to their factorydefault values

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1723

levation Gains (Raise and Lower) 14GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Lock-Out Value Range Level 1 - Unlocked Level2 - Moderate Level 3 - Restricted

bull Level 1 ndash all Performance Menu items are accessible to the operator

bull Level 2ndash some items no longer appear in the Performance Menu and are only accessible in theTechnicianrsquos Menu

bull Level 3 ndash additional items no longer appear in the Performance Menu and are only accessible in theTechnicianrsquos Menu

Lock Menu Settings

Table 3 lists the settings that can be locked out (made unavailable)

Elevation Gains (Raise and Lower)

Elevation Gains determines the speed at which your Topcon P-32 System allows the tow point cylinders to adjustto a change in elevation For faster hydraulic response increase the gain value For slower hydraulic responsedecrease the gain value

The objective is to set the gain so the screed reacts to the change in grade quickly but without ldquoovershootingrdquothe new elevation

Gain Elevation Value Range 1-200

Table 3 Paver Lock Menu Settings

Performance Menu Item Level 1 - Unlocked Level 2 - Moderate Level 3 - Restricted

1 Elevation Gains Available Available Locked

2 Slope Gain Available Available Locked

3 Valve Offsets Available Available Locked

4 Elevation Deadband Available Locked Locked

5 Slope Deadband Available Locked Locked

6 Averaging Available Locked Locked

7 Machine Type Available Available Available

8 Display Available Available Available

9 Units Available Available Available

10 System Info Available Available Available

11 Sonic Tracker 3 Available Available Available

12 Slope Resolution Available Available Available

13 Slope Cal Block Available Available Locked

14 Tech Menu Available Available Available

Before setting the Elevation Gain make sure the machines hydraulic flow controls valves are adjustedfor proper cylinder speed according to the manufacturers recommendations

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1823

lope Gain 15GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Slope Gain

This setting determines the speed at which your Topcon P-32 System allows the tow point cylinders to adjustto a change in slope For faster hydraulic response increase the gain value For slower hydraulic responsedecrease the gain value

The objective is to set the gain so the screed reacts to the change in grade quickly but without ldquoovershootingrdquoOn-Grade Slope Gain should not be set at a higher value than the Elevation Gain on the other side of the paver

Gain Elevation Value Range 1-100

Valve Offsets (Raise and Lower)

Valve Offsets is the minimum amount of electrical signals sent to the valve which causes the hydraulic cylinderto move If the valve offset is too small the sensor will not reach On-Grade Likewise if the valve offset valueis too large the sensor will move too much and overshoot On-Grade

Run the Paver until the hydraulic oil is at normal operating temperature before setting the valve offsets Oncethey are set you should not need to readjust the valve offsets unless the Control Box is moved to a new paveror the hydraulic performance changes

Valve Offset Value Range (Raise and Lower) 1 - 999

Elevation Deadband

Elevation Deadband is the area of the Working Window that is On-Grade While the reference is within that areathe paverrsquos valves are idle (closed) Therefore the wider the Elevation Deadband (On-Grade area) the more areference can move up or down without a correction being initiated Once the signal from the reference is outof the deadband your control box drives the hydraulics to place the reference back in the center of thedeadband

Deadband Elevation Value Range 1ndash30 mm

Before setting the Slope Gain ensure the machines hydraulic flow control valves are adjusted forproper cylinder speed according to the manufacturers recommendations

Do not set slope gain at a higher value than the elevation gain on the other side of the paver A highervalue may cause the slope to be over reactive

Set the Valve Offsets before adjusting elevation and slope gains and averaging

The offset value on one side of the paver may differ from the offset value on the other side of thepaver You must verify the offset values before swapping boxes Use the ldquoLeftrdquo and ldquoRightrdquo labelsprovided

Never attempt to use Valve Offsets to compensate for a slower raise or lower speed of your hydraulicvalves as it causes undershooting or overshooting in Slope Mode and can adversely affect the qualityof the mat

Select the amount of Elevation Deadband carefully Too small of an Elevation Deadband causes thetow point cylinder to constantly hunt up and down while the sensor tries to find On-Grade Too largeof an Elevation Deadband does not allow the sensor to send grade corrections to the values causingunwanted variations in mat thickness

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1923

lope Deadband 16GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Slope Deadband

Slope Deadband defines the size of the on-grade area where no valve corrections are made

Deadband Slope Value Range 0025ndash075

The wider the Slope Deadband the greater the slope can vary without initiating a correction

For example if the operator is grading at a 20 slope and the Slope Deadband is set at 10 the system

reads on-grade anywhere from 195 slope to 205 slope The lower the percentage the tighter the SlopeDeadband

Once the slope signal is out of the Slope Deadband System Five drives the hydraulics back within the SlopeDeadband

Working Window Adjustment

Working Window Adjustment adjusts the working window of the sonic tracker (Figure 5)

Working Window Settings 0ndash500 Off

Default 020

The default setting is 020 which gives 020 ft (61 mm) above and below on-grade Setting the value to Offcompletely disables the working window and allows any target to be seen

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 2023

lope Working Window 17GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Figure 5 Sonic Tracker Working Window

Slope Working Window

Slope Working Window adjusts the working window of the Slope Sensor (Figure 6)

Slope Working Window Value Range 01 - 100 Off

Default 20

The default setting is 20 which gives 20 slope above and below ongrade Setting the value to Off completelydisables the working window

Out of Range

Ongrade

Flashing UpDown Arrow

Solid UpDown Arrow

20rsquo

20rsquo

20rsquo

20rsquo

Working

Window

(Adjustable)

ST-3 Sonic Tracker II

When using the Sonic Tracker II to follow a stringline curb or other elevated reference there is adanger of making an unwanted cut if the Trackerrsquos sonic cone moves away from the target This canoccur if the working window is either off or set as high as the distance between the reference and theground Setting the working window to the default value of 20 (020ft) prevents the automatic controlfrom making such a reaction due to a loss of the target

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 2123

martlink (Elevation and Slope) 18GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Figure 6 Slope Working Window

Smartlink (Elevation and Slope)

Smartlink allows the Control Box to send a percentage of the slopeelevation correction on one side of themachine to the Control Box on the other side of the machine preemptively raising or lowering that hydrauliccylinder to keep the machine at the correct grade Smartlink decreases the lag in correction that can occur onone side of the machine as the second Control Box begins moving the valve without having to wait for thesensor on the other side of the machine to detect and correct for a change in elevationslope

Smartlink Value Range 0 - 100

Default 0

Out of Range

Working Window (Adjustable)

Ongrade

20

20

Ongrade

20

20

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 2223

Warranty 19GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

bull bull bull bull bull bull

Warranty

Topcon laser and electronic positioning equipment are guaranteed against defective material and workmanshipunder normal use and application consistent with this Manual The equipment is guaranteed for the period indicatedon the warranty card accompanying the product starting from the date that the product is sold to the originalpurchaser by Topconrsquos Authorized Dealers1

During the warranty period Topcon will at its option repair or replace this product at no additional charge Repairparts and replacement products will be furnished on an exchange basis and will be either reconditioned or new Thislimited warranty does not include service to repair damage to the product resulting from an accident disastermisuses abuse or modification of the product

Warranty service may be obtained from an authorized Topcon warranty service dealer If this product is deliveredby mail purchaser agrees to insure the product or assume the risk of loss or damage in transit to prepay shippingcharges to the warranty service location and to use the original shipping container or equivalent A letter shouldaccompany the package furnishing a description of the problem andor defect

The purchaserrsquos sole remedy shall be replacement as provided above In no event shall Topcon be liable for anydamages or other claim including any claim for lost profits lost savings or other incidental or consequential damagesarising out of the use of or inability to use the product

1 The warranty against defects in a Topcon battery charger or cable is 90 days

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 2323

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 423

iPN 1001548-02

bull bull bull bull bull bull

Table of Contents

Preface iii

Terms and Conditions iii

Manual Conventions vIntroduction 1

Features 1

Powering the Control Box OnOff 2

Control Screen 2

Accessing the Technicianrsquos Menu 3

Technicianrsquos Menu 9

Configuration 10

Configuration Codes 10 Averaging 11

Valve Type 11

Proportional Current 11

Proportional Pulse Width Modulated 11

Solenoid 11

Danfoss 12

Valve Drive 12

Dither Amplitude 12Dither Frequency 12

Frequency 12

Max Current 12

Hour 13

External Auto 13

Auto Power (Paver Only) 13

Esup2 Reset 13

Lock Menu 14Lock Menu Settings 14

Elevation Gains (Raise and Lower) 14

Slope Gain 15

Valve Offsets (Raise and Lower) 15

Elevation Deadband 15

Slope Deadband 16

Working Window Adjustment 16

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 523

iiPN 1001548-02

Slope Working Window 18

Smartlink (Elevation and Slope) 18

Warranty 19

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 623

Preface iiGC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

bull bull bull bull bull bull

Preface

Thank you for purchasing this Topcon product The materials available in this Manual (the ldquoManualrdquo) have been preparedby Topcon Positioning Systems Inc (ldquoTPSrdquo) for owners of Topcon products and are designed to assist owners with theuse of the product and its use is subject to these terms and conditions (the ldquoTerms and Conditionsrdquo)

Terms and Conditions

Use

This product is designed to be used by a professional The user should have a good knowledge of the safe use of theproduct and implement the types of safety procedures recommended by the local government protection agency for bothprivate use and commercial job sites

Copyrights

All information contained in this Manual is the intellectual property of and copyrighted material of TPS All rights arereserved Do not use access copy store display create derivative works of sell modify publish distribute or allow anythird party access to any graphics content information or data in this Manual without TPSrsquo express written consent andmay only use such information for the care and operation of the product The information and data in this Manual are avaluable asset of TPS and are developed by the expenditure of considerable work time and money and are the result oforiginal selection coordination and arrangement by TPS

Trademarks

HiPer SRtrade TRUtrade Magnettrade Pocket-3Dtrade Topconreg and Topcon Positioning Systemstrade are trademarks or registeredtrademarks of TPS Windowsreg is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation The Bluetoothreg word mark and logosare owned by Bluetooth SIG Inc and any use of such marks by Topcon Positioning Systems Inc is used under licenseOther product and company names mentioned herein may be trademarks of their respective owners

Disclaimer of Warranty

EXCEPT FOR ANY WARRANTIES IN AN APPENDIX OR A WARRANTY CARD ACCOMPANYING THE PRODUCT THIS MANUAL AND THE PRODUCT ARE PROVIDED ldquoAS-ISrdquo THERE ARE NO OTHER WARRANTIES TPS DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIEDWARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR USE OR PURPOSE TPS AND ITS DISTRIBUTORSSHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR TECHNICAL OR EDITORIAL ERRORS OR OMISSIONS CONTAINED HEREIN NOR FORINCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM THE FURNISHING PERFORMANCE OR USE OF THIS

MATERIAL OR THE PRODUCT SUCH DISCLAIMED DAMAGES INCLUDE BUT ARE NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF TIME LOSSOR DESTRUCTION OF DATA LOSS OF PROFIT SAVINGS OR REVENUE OR LOSS OF THE PRODUCTrsquoS USE IN ADDITIONTPS IS NOT RESPONSIBLE OR LIABLE FOR DAMAGES OR COSTS INCURRED IN CONNECTION WITH OBTAININGSUBSTITUTE PRODUCTS OR SOFTWARE CLAIMS BY OTHERS INCONVENIENCE OR ANY OTHER COSTS IN ANY EVENTTPS SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES OR OTHERWISE TO YOU OR ANY OTHER PERSON OR ENTITY IN EXCESSOF THE PURCHASE PRICE FOR THE PRODUCT

Please read the terms and conditions carefully

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 723

erms and Conditions ivGC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

License Agreement

Use of any computer programs or software supplied by TPS or downloaded from a TPS website (the ldquoSoftwarerdquo) inconnection with the product constitutes acceptance of these Terms and Conditions in this Manual and an agreementto abide by these Terms and Conditions The user is granted a personal non-exclusive non-transferable license touse such Software under the terms stated herein and in any case only with a single product You may not assign ortransfer the Software or this license without the express written consent of TPS This license is effective untilterminated You may terminate the license at any time by destroying the Software and Manual TPS may terminatethe license if you fail to comply with any of the Terms or Conditions You agree to destroy the Software and manual

upon termination of the use of the product All ownership copyright and other intellectual property rights in and tothe Software belong to TPS If these license terms are not acceptable return any unused software and manual

Confidentiality

This Manual its contents and the Software (collectively the ldquoConfidential Informationrdquo) are the confidential andproprietary information of TPS You agree to treat TPSrsquo Confidential Information with a degree of care no less stringentthat the degree of care you would use in safeguarding your own most valuable trade secrets Nothing in this paragraphshall restrict you from disclosing Confidential Information to your employees as may be necessary or appropriate tooperate or care for the product Such employees must also keep the Confidentiality Information confidential In theevent you become legally compelled to disclose any of the Confidential Information you shall give TPS immediatenotice so that it may seek a protective order or other appropriate remedy

Website Other Statements

No statement contained at the TPS website (or any other website) or in any other advertisements or TPS literatureor made by an employee or independent contractor of TPS modifies these Terms and Conditions (including theSoftware license warranty and limitation of liability)

Safety

Improper use of the product can lead to injury to persons or property andor malfunction of the product The productshould only be repaired by authorized TPS warranty service centers Users should review and heed the safety warnings

in an Appendix

Miscellaneous

The above Terms and Conditions may be amended modified superseded or canceled at any time by TPS The aboveTerms and Conditions will be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of Californiawithout reference to conflict of laws

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 823

Manual Conventions vGC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Manual Conventions

This manual uses the following conventions

Convention Description Example

Bold Menu or drop-down menu item File Exit (Click the File menu and clickExit)

Name of a dialog box or screen From the Connection screen

Button or key commands Click Finish

Mono User supplied text or variable Type guest and click Enter

Italic Reference to another manual or help document Refer to the Topcon Reference Manual

Further information to note about system configuration maintenance or setup

Supplementary information that can have an adverse affect on system operation systemperformance data integrity measurements or personal safety

Notification that an action has the potential to result in system damage loss of data loss ofwarranty or personal injury

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 923

Introduction 1GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

bull bull bull bull bull bull

Introduction

The Technicians Menu contains additional system menu items not available to the operator (end user) in the GC-35 Control Box Performance Menu

These menu items offer the ability to override default settings of the P-32 system to improve system performancein certain situations These menu items are not however meant to be changed by the operator

The following sections describe the features of the GC-35 control box and explain how to access the TechnicianrsquosMenu select a menu item save the new value and exit the Technicianrsquos Menu

Features

Figure 1 GC-35 Control Box

Access to the Technicianrsquos Menu is intended for and should be limited to Topcon qualified dealerand field service technicians Any changes to the factory default settings without a thoroughunderstanding to their effects on the P-32 system may cause adverse consequences to systemaccuracy and operation

Auto Indicator LED

Auto Button

Survey Button

Elevation Indicator

LED (Green)

Slope Indicator

LED (Yellow)

SlopeElevation

Button

Jog UpDown

Buttons

LCD

Light Sensor

Power OnOff

Button

Grade Adjustment

Knob

Grade Adjustment

Arrows

Menu Selection

Buttons

Grade Indicator

LEDs

USB Port

USB Cap

(Removed)

Jaw Mount

Power Connector

Sonic Tracker or Slope Sensor

Connectors

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1023

owering the Control Box OnOff 2GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Powering the Control Box OnOff

Figure 2 Power OnOff

Control ScreenThe Control Screen displays when you power on the control box It is your interface with the components ofthe P-32 system The Control Screen changes depending on how you have configured the Control Box and theP-32 system

The illustration below shows an example of a Control Box set up to display information from a secondary ControlBox set up for Slope Control

Figure 3 Control Screen

Power OnOff

Button

Startup Screen Shutdown Screen

GC-35

Shutting Down

con1047297g 21

Elevation Set

Point Value

Actual Elevation

Sensor Reading

Slope Set Point Value

PositiveNegative

Slope Indicator Icon

Actual Slope

Sensor Reading

MenuSet

Button Function

Display Area

Elevation Icon

Units (ftincm)

ST-3 SurfaceStringline Mode Icon

Display Slope Box

Auto Icon

Slope Icon

Primary Control Box Display Area

Secondary Control Box

Display Area

Cross Communication

On-Grade Icon

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1123

ccessing the Technicianrsquos Menu 3GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Accessing the Technicianrsquos Menu

1 From the Control Screen press the MenuSet button

2 Rotate the Grade Adjustment Knob to scroll through the menu selections displayed on the screen

3 Select Tech Menu and press and hold the Enter button for three (3) seconds to enter the

Technicianrsquos Menu

Figure 4 Accessing the Technicianrsquos Menu

Press MenuSet Button Turn Grade Adjustment Knob Press and Hold

Enter Button for 3 Seconds

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1223

Technicianrsquos Menu 9GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

bull bull bull bull bull bull

Technicianrsquos Menu

This chapter describes the Technicianrsquos Menu items and their default factory settings

Table 1 lists the available menus

Table 1 Technicianrsquos Menu Settings

Menu Item Range Default Factory Setting

Configuration External 0ndash31 Custom External

Averaging 1 ndash 100 50

Valve Type Solenoid ProportionalDanfoss Pulse WidthModulated

Proportional

Valve Drive Sink Source Sink

Dither Amplitude 0ndash15 4

Dither Frequency 0ndash105 42

Frequency 1ndash13Hz

225ndash1950Hz

5Hz

Max Current 067ndash48 Amps 175 Amps

Hour Read only Hours 00

Hours Auto 00

External Auto On Off Invert Off

Auto Power Up (Paver only) On Off On

Esup2 Reset Cancel Reset Cancel

Lock Menu Level 1 - Unlocked

Level 2 - Moderate

Level 3 - Restricted

Level 1 - Unlocked

Elevation Gains Raise 1 ndash 200 Raise 25

Lower 1 ndash 200 Lower 25

Slope Gain 1 ndash 100 25

Valve Offsets Raise 1 ndash 999 Raise 135

Lower 1 ndash 999 Lower 135

Elevation Deadband 1 ndash 30 mm 3 mm

Slope Deadband 0025 ndash 075 0075

Working Window 0ndash500 Off 020 ft

Slope Working Window 01-100 20

Smartlink Slope 0 - 100 Slope 0

Elevation 0 - 100 Elevation 0

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1323

onfiguration 10GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Configuration

This setting selects a valve drive configuration and has up to 32 preprogrammed configurations to select from You may also create a custom configuration

Configuration Value Range External 0-31 Custom

Default External

bull External ndash Upon power up the control box looks for an external configuration resistor between pins Land K of the 11 pin bulkhead connector and defaults to the listed configuration table for valve control

The configuration number displays on the control box LCD when the box is turned onbull Value between 0-31 ndash The control box defaults to the valve control parameters for this number listed inthe configuration chart (see Table 2 on page 10) The configuration number displays on the control boxLCD when the box is turned on

bull Custom ndash Create a custom valve control configuration by setting the Valve Type Current DirectionCurrent Limit Frequency (for PWM modes and Solenoid) Dither Amplitude (except Solenoid mode) andDither Frequency (except Solenoid mode)

Configuration Codes

Table 2 lists available configurations

Table 2 Configuration Codes

ConfigResistor

(ohms)

Drive Type Current Direction Dither Amplitude Dither Freq Freq Hz Current Limit

0 0 Sol Sink None None Adj None

1 77

2 160

3 249

4 341

5 441 Sol Source None None Adj None

6 560 Sol Source None None Adj None

7 670

8 800 Sol Source None None Adj None

9 940 Sol Source None None Adj None10 1100 Sol Sink None None Adj None

11 1260 Sol Source None None Adj

12 1445

14 1890

15 2140 Pro Cur Source 6 42 NA 175A

17 2760 Sol Sink None None Adj None

18 3140 Sol Sink None None Adj None

19 3583 Sol Source None None Adj None

20 4104 Sol Sink None None Adj None

21 4725 Sol Sink None None Adj None

22 5480 Sol

23 6414

26 11310 Sol Source None None Adj None

27 14440

28 19440

29 28670

30 51500 Pro Cur Source 12 42 NA 175A

31 open Pro Cur Sink 6 42 NA 175A

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1423

veraging 11GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Averaging

Averaging changes the amount of dampening or filtering applied to the laser receiver or elevation sensormeasurements Averaging can be thought of as the time period over which a running average of the elevationmeasurement is calculated

Averaging Value Range 1ndash100

Default 50

A lower value averages fewer elevation measurements allowing the system to react more quickly to grade

changes

A larger value averages more elevation measurements making the system less reactive to fluctuations in gradesuch as with laser ldquobeam bouncerdquo on windy days

Valve Type

Valve Type allows you to select the type of valves used on your machine

Valve Type Value Range Solenoid Servo Proportional Danfoss Pulse PWMDefault Proportional

The following sections describe each of these valve types

Proportional Current

Proportional Current provides a current regulated proportional output and is the preferred setting forproportional valves

A percentage of the total current setting is calculated based on the gain setting and given grade correctionProportional Current control applies full machine voltage to the valve coil until the desired current is reachedthen the voltage is turned off When the current drops below the desired value the process is repeated

Proportional Pulse Width Modulated

Proportional Pulse Width Modulated provides a pulse width regulated proportional output

A percentage of the total duty cycle is calculated based on the gain setting and the given grade correction PulseWidth Modulation cycles the output voltage on and off at the desired duty cycle

Solenoid

Solenoid operates the same as PWM mode except set up specifically for the lower frequency solenoid valves

Danfoss

Danfoss provides a proportional voltage output to drive the specific requirements of the Danfoss brand ofproportional valves In this mode switched power (Vsw) and ground connect to the Danfoss valve through thevalve cable and the Raise output pin of the control box controls the reference signal to the valve In a neutral(no grade) correction output the reference signal is held at half of the switched voltage For example if a 12volt system produced 13 volts on the Vsw line 65 volts are held on the reference output for a no correctionsignal

bull For a raise correction signal the control box increases the reference voltage from 65 to a maximum of975 V

Averaging does not affect slope control

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1523

alve Drive 12GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

bull For a lower output signal the control box decreases the reference voltage to a minimum of 325 V

Valve Drive

Valve Drive selects the current direction of the valves on the machine

Valve Drive Value Range Sink Source

Select Sink if the valve has a permanent positive connection and needs a switched negative connection (thecontrol box sinks current)

Select Source if the valve has a permanent ground (negative) connection and needs a switched positiveconnection (the control box sources current)

Dither Amplitude

Dither Amplitude allows you to select the amount of dither to apply to the valve

Dither is a continuous low frequency ldquopulserdquo applied to the valve drive signal for proportional valves to keep thevalversquos spool from sticking

Dither Amplitude Value Range 0ndash15

Dither Amplitude is a percentage of full current for the Proportional Current valve type or duty cycle for thePWM valve type Dither does not apply for Solenoid Danfoss or Servo valve types

Dither Frequency

Dither Frequency adjusts the frequency of the dither in cycles per second

Dither Frequency Value Range 0ndash105 Hz

Frequency

Frequency adjusts the number of pulses sent to control valves in one secondFrequency Value Range 1ndash13 Hz 225ndash1950 Hz

The frequency value is adjustable from 1 to 13 Hz for Solenoid valves On Pulse Width Modulated mode valvesthe range is 225 to 1950 Hz

Max Current

Max Current adjusts the maximum valve drive current that the control box outputs when using ProportionalCurrent valve output mode and the over-current trip level for other valve types

Current Limit Value Range 067ndash48 Amps

If a Danfoss valve sees a reference voltage greater than 75 of Vsw or below 25 of Vsw the valvedefaults to an ldquoerrorrdquo state and the valve is held in the neutral position

Frequency does not apply for Proportional Current and Danfoss valve types

Changing the Frequency has an effect on the Offset Check the Offset after changing theFrequency

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1623

our 13GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Hour

Hour displays the amount of hours the control box has been operating and the amount of hours the control boxhas been operating in Automatic

Hour Settings No settings (read only)

External Auto

External Auto disables or enables an external automanual switch

External Auto Settings OnOffInvert

If On is selected the system requires both an external AM switch and activation of the Control Boxrsquos Autobutton to switch the system in and out of Automatic control Activate the external AM switch by connectingpin E of the 11 PIN bulkhead to ground

If you select Invert connecting pin E to ground takes the system out of Automatic control Automatic controlactivates only when pin E is connected to power such as when connecting to an in-motion switch

Auto Power (Paver Only)

The Auto Power setting allows the system to automatically power up to the last used mode

Auto Power Settings OnOff

When the Auto Power setting is On the system powers up in the last mode seen before power down (Auto orManual) For example the paver is in automatic control is shut down and then powered up once more Thepaver is now ready to pave in Auto

When the Auto Power setting is Off the operator must press the Auto button to return to Auto after a powerdown

Esup2 Reset

Esup2 Reset reconfigures the system to factory settings

Esup2 Reset Settings Range CancelReset

To reset all settings in the Performance Menu and the Technician Menu to factory defaults select Reset and press and hold the Enter button for three (3) seconds

To cancel and return to the previous screen select Cancel

Lock Menu

The Lock-Out Setting allows certain Performance Settings in the Performance Menu to be made inaccessibleto the operator (see ldquoPaver Lock Menu Settingsrdquo on page 14)

If the Auto Power setting is On the machine powers up in Auto any time it was shut down in AutoOnly use Auto Power On in asphalt paver applications

Setting Auto Power to On for a machine other than asphalt pavers is not recommended Seriousinjury to operators or bystanders from unexpected machine movement could result

If you select Reset the Control Box reverts your custom Control Box settings back to their factorydefault values

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1723

levation Gains (Raise and Lower) 14GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Lock-Out Value Range Level 1 - Unlocked Level2 - Moderate Level 3 - Restricted

bull Level 1 ndash all Performance Menu items are accessible to the operator

bull Level 2ndash some items no longer appear in the Performance Menu and are only accessible in theTechnicianrsquos Menu

bull Level 3 ndash additional items no longer appear in the Performance Menu and are only accessible in theTechnicianrsquos Menu

Lock Menu Settings

Table 3 lists the settings that can be locked out (made unavailable)

Elevation Gains (Raise and Lower)

Elevation Gains determines the speed at which your Topcon P-32 System allows the tow point cylinders to adjustto a change in elevation For faster hydraulic response increase the gain value For slower hydraulic responsedecrease the gain value

The objective is to set the gain so the screed reacts to the change in grade quickly but without ldquoovershootingrdquothe new elevation

Gain Elevation Value Range 1-200

Table 3 Paver Lock Menu Settings

Performance Menu Item Level 1 - Unlocked Level 2 - Moderate Level 3 - Restricted

1 Elevation Gains Available Available Locked

2 Slope Gain Available Available Locked

3 Valve Offsets Available Available Locked

4 Elevation Deadband Available Locked Locked

5 Slope Deadband Available Locked Locked

6 Averaging Available Locked Locked

7 Machine Type Available Available Available

8 Display Available Available Available

9 Units Available Available Available

10 System Info Available Available Available

11 Sonic Tracker 3 Available Available Available

12 Slope Resolution Available Available Available

13 Slope Cal Block Available Available Locked

14 Tech Menu Available Available Available

Before setting the Elevation Gain make sure the machines hydraulic flow controls valves are adjustedfor proper cylinder speed according to the manufacturers recommendations

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1823

lope Gain 15GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Slope Gain

This setting determines the speed at which your Topcon P-32 System allows the tow point cylinders to adjustto a change in slope For faster hydraulic response increase the gain value For slower hydraulic responsedecrease the gain value

The objective is to set the gain so the screed reacts to the change in grade quickly but without ldquoovershootingrdquoOn-Grade Slope Gain should not be set at a higher value than the Elevation Gain on the other side of the paver

Gain Elevation Value Range 1-100

Valve Offsets (Raise and Lower)

Valve Offsets is the minimum amount of electrical signals sent to the valve which causes the hydraulic cylinderto move If the valve offset is too small the sensor will not reach On-Grade Likewise if the valve offset valueis too large the sensor will move too much and overshoot On-Grade

Run the Paver until the hydraulic oil is at normal operating temperature before setting the valve offsets Oncethey are set you should not need to readjust the valve offsets unless the Control Box is moved to a new paveror the hydraulic performance changes

Valve Offset Value Range (Raise and Lower) 1 - 999

Elevation Deadband

Elevation Deadband is the area of the Working Window that is On-Grade While the reference is within that areathe paverrsquos valves are idle (closed) Therefore the wider the Elevation Deadband (On-Grade area) the more areference can move up or down without a correction being initiated Once the signal from the reference is outof the deadband your control box drives the hydraulics to place the reference back in the center of thedeadband

Deadband Elevation Value Range 1ndash30 mm

Before setting the Slope Gain ensure the machines hydraulic flow control valves are adjusted forproper cylinder speed according to the manufacturers recommendations

Do not set slope gain at a higher value than the elevation gain on the other side of the paver A highervalue may cause the slope to be over reactive

Set the Valve Offsets before adjusting elevation and slope gains and averaging

The offset value on one side of the paver may differ from the offset value on the other side of thepaver You must verify the offset values before swapping boxes Use the ldquoLeftrdquo and ldquoRightrdquo labelsprovided

Never attempt to use Valve Offsets to compensate for a slower raise or lower speed of your hydraulicvalves as it causes undershooting or overshooting in Slope Mode and can adversely affect the qualityof the mat

Select the amount of Elevation Deadband carefully Too small of an Elevation Deadband causes thetow point cylinder to constantly hunt up and down while the sensor tries to find On-Grade Too largeof an Elevation Deadband does not allow the sensor to send grade corrections to the values causingunwanted variations in mat thickness

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1923

lope Deadband 16GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Slope Deadband

Slope Deadband defines the size of the on-grade area where no valve corrections are made

Deadband Slope Value Range 0025ndash075

The wider the Slope Deadband the greater the slope can vary without initiating a correction

For example if the operator is grading at a 20 slope and the Slope Deadband is set at 10 the system

reads on-grade anywhere from 195 slope to 205 slope The lower the percentage the tighter the SlopeDeadband

Once the slope signal is out of the Slope Deadband System Five drives the hydraulics back within the SlopeDeadband

Working Window Adjustment

Working Window Adjustment adjusts the working window of the sonic tracker (Figure 5)

Working Window Settings 0ndash500 Off

Default 020

The default setting is 020 which gives 020 ft (61 mm) above and below on-grade Setting the value to Offcompletely disables the working window and allows any target to be seen

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 2023

lope Working Window 17GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Figure 5 Sonic Tracker Working Window

Slope Working Window

Slope Working Window adjusts the working window of the Slope Sensor (Figure 6)

Slope Working Window Value Range 01 - 100 Off

Default 20

The default setting is 20 which gives 20 slope above and below ongrade Setting the value to Off completelydisables the working window

Out of Range

Ongrade

Flashing UpDown Arrow

Solid UpDown Arrow

20rsquo

20rsquo

20rsquo

20rsquo

Working

Window

(Adjustable)

ST-3 Sonic Tracker II

When using the Sonic Tracker II to follow a stringline curb or other elevated reference there is adanger of making an unwanted cut if the Trackerrsquos sonic cone moves away from the target This canoccur if the working window is either off or set as high as the distance between the reference and theground Setting the working window to the default value of 20 (020ft) prevents the automatic controlfrom making such a reaction due to a loss of the target

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 2123

martlink (Elevation and Slope) 18GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Figure 6 Slope Working Window

Smartlink (Elevation and Slope)

Smartlink allows the Control Box to send a percentage of the slopeelevation correction on one side of themachine to the Control Box on the other side of the machine preemptively raising or lowering that hydrauliccylinder to keep the machine at the correct grade Smartlink decreases the lag in correction that can occur onone side of the machine as the second Control Box begins moving the valve without having to wait for thesensor on the other side of the machine to detect and correct for a change in elevationslope

Smartlink Value Range 0 - 100

Default 0

Out of Range

Working Window (Adjustable)

Ongrade

20

20

Ongrade

20

20

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 2223

Warranty 19GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

bull bull bull bull bull bull

Warranty

Topcon laser and electronic positioning equipment are guaranteed against defective material and workmanshipunder normal use and application consistent with this Manual The equipment is guaranteed for the period indicatedon the warranty card accompanying the product starting from the date that the product is sold to the originalpurchaser by Topconrsquos Authorized Dealers1

During the warranty period Topcon will at its option repair or replace this product at no additional charge Repairparts and replacement products will be furnished on an exchange basis and will be either reconditioned or new Thislimited warranty does not include service to repair damage to the product resulting from an accident disastermisuses abuse or modification of the product

Warranty service may be obtained from an authorized Topcon warranty service dealer If this product is deliveredby mail purchaser agrees to insure the product or assume the risk of loss or damage in transit to prepay shippingcharges to the warranty service location and to use the original shipping container or equivalent A letter shouldaccompany the package furnishing a description of the problem andor defect

The purchaserrsquos sole remedy shall be replacement as provided above In no event shall Topcon be liable for anydamages or other claim including any claim for lost profits lost savings or other incidental or consequential damagesarising out of the use of or inability to use the product

1 The warranty against defects in a Topcon battery charger or cable is 90 days

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 2323

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 523

iiPN 1001548-02

Slope Working Window 18

Smartlink (Elevation and Slope) 18

Warranty 19

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 623

Preface iiGC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

bull bull bull bull bull bull

Preface

Thank you for purchasing this Topcon product The materials available in this Manual (the ldquoManualrdquo) have been preparedby Topcon Positioning Systems Inc (ldquoTPSrdquo) for owners of Topcon products and are designed to assist owners with theuse of the product and its use is subject to these terms and conditions (the ldquoTerms and Conditionsrdquo)

Terms and Conditions

Use

This product is designed to be used by a professional The user should have a good knowledge of the safe use of theproduct and implement the types of safety procedures recommended by the local government protection agency for bothprivate use and commercial job sites

Copyrights

All information contained in this Manual is the intellectual property of and copyrighted material of TPS All rights arereserved Do not use access copy store display create derivative works of sell modify publish distribute or allow anythird party access to any graphics content information or data in this Manual without TPSrsquo express written consent andmay only use such information for the care and operation of the product The information and data in this Manual are avaluable asset of TPS and are developed by the expenditure of considerable work time and money and are the result oforiginal selection coordination and arrangement by TPS

Trademarks

HiPer SRtrade TRUtrade Magnettrade Pocket-3Dtrade Topconreg and Topcon Positioning Systemstrade are trademarks or registeredtrademarks of TPS Windowsreg is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation The Bluetoothreg word mark and logosare owned by Bluetooth SIG Inc and any use of such marks by Topcon Positioning Systems Inc is used under licenseOther product and company names mentioned herein may be trademarks of their respective owners

Disclaimer of Warranty

EXCEPT FOR ANY WARRANTIES IN AN APPENDIX OR A WARRANTY CARD ACCOMPANYING THE PRODUCT THIS MANUAL AND THE PRODUCT ARE PROVIDED ldquoAS-ISrdquo THERE ARE NO OTHER WARRANTIES TPS DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIEDWARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR USE OR PURPOSE TPS AND ITS DISTRIBUTORSSHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR TECHNICAL OR EDITORIAL ERRORS OR OMISSIONS CONTAINED HEREIN NOR FORINCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM THE FURNISHING PERFORMANCE OR USE OF THIS

MATERIAL OR THE PRODUCT SUCH DISCLAIMED DAMAGES INCLUDE BUT ARE NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF TIME LOSSOR DESTRUCTION OF DATA LOSS OF PROFIT SAVINGS OR REVENUE OR LOSS OF THE PRODUCTrsquoS USE IN ADDITIONTPS IS NOT RESPONSIBLE OR LIABLE FOR DAMAGES OR COSTS INCURRED IN CONNECTION WITH OBTAININGSUBSTITUTE PRODUCTS OR SOFTWARE CLAIMS BY OTHERS INCONVENIENCE OR ANY OTHER COSTS IN ANY EVENTTPS SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES OR OTHERWISE TO YOU OR ANY OTHER PERSON OR ENTITY IN EXCESSOF THE PURCHASE PRICE FOR THE PRODUCT

Please read the terms and conditions carefully

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 723

erms and Conditions ivGC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

License Agreement

Use of any computer programs or software supplied by TPS or downloaded from a TPS website (the ldquoSoftwarerdquo) inconnection with the product constitutes acceptance of these Terms and Conditions in this Manual and an agreementto abide by these Terms and Conditions The user is granted a personal non-exclusive non-transferable license touse such Software under the terms stated herein and in any case only with a single product You may not assign ortransfer the Software or this license without the express written consent of TPS This license is effective untilterminated You may terminate the license at any time by destroying the Software and Manual TPS may terminatethe license if you fail to comply with any of the Terms or Conditions You agree to destroy the Software and manual

upon termination of the use of the product All ownership copyright and other intellectual property rights in and tothe Software belong to TPS If these license terms are not acceptable return any unused software and manual

Confidentiality

This Manual its contents and the Software (collectively the ldquoConfidential Informationrdquo) are the confidential andproprietary information of TPS You agree to treat TPSrsquo Confidential Information with a degree of care no less stringentthat the degree of care you would use in safeguarding your own most valuable trade secrets Nothing in this paragraphshall restrict you from disclosing Confidential Information to your employees as may be necessary or appropriate tooperate or care for the product Such employees must also keep the Confidentiality Information confidential In theevent you become legally compelled to disclose any of the Confidential Information you shall give TPS immediatenotice so that it may seek a protective order or other appropriate remedy

Website Other Statements

No statement contained at the TPS website (or any other website) or in any other advertisements or TPS literatureor made by an employee or independent contractor of TPS modifies these Terms and Conditions (including theSoftware license warranty and limitation of liability)

Safety

Improper use of the product can lead to injury to persons or property andor malfunction of the product The productshould only be repaired by authorized TPS warranty service centers Users should review and heed the safety warnings

in an Appendix

Miscellaneous

The above Terms and Conditions may be amended modified superseded or canceled at any time by TPS The aboveTerms and Conditions will be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of Californiawithout reference to conflict of laws

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 823

Manual Conventions vGC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Manual Conventions

This manual uses the following conventions

Convention Description Example

Bold Menu or drop-down menu item File Exit (Click the File menu and clickExit)

Name of a dialog box or screen From the Connection screen

Button or key commands Click Finish

Mono User supplied text or variable Type guest and click Enter

Italic Reference to another manual or help document Refer to the Topcon Reference Manual

Further information to note about system configuration maintenance or setup

Supplementary information that can have an adverse affect on system operation systemperformance data integrity measurements or personal safety

Notification that an action has the potential to result in system damage loss of data loss ofwarranty or personal injury

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 923

Introduction 1GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

bull bull bull bull bull bull

Introduction

The Technicians Menu contains additional system menu items not available to the operator (end user) in the GC-35 Control Box Performance Menu

These menu items offer the ability to override default settings of the P-32 system to improve system performancein certain situations These menu items are not however meant to be changed by the operator

The following sections describe the features of the GC-35 control box and explain how to access the TechnicianrsquosMenu select a menu item save the new value and exit the Technicianrsquos Menu

Features

Figure 1 GC-35 Control Box

Access to the Technicianrsquos Menu is intended for and should be limited to Topcon qualified dealerand field service technicians Any changes to the factory default settings without a thoroughunderstanding to their effects on the P-32 system may cause adverse consequences to systemaccuracy and operation

Auto Indicator LED

Auto Button

Survey Button

Elevation Indicator

LED (Green)

Slope Indicator

LED (Yellow)

SlopeElevation

Button

Jog UpDown

Buttons

LCD

Light Sensor

Power OnOff

Button

Grade Adjustment

Knob

Grade Adjustment

Arrows

Menu Selection

Buttons

Grade Indicator

LEDs

USB Port

USB Cap

(Removed)

Jaw Mount

Power Connector

Sonic Tracker or Slope Sensor

Connectors

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1023

owering the Control Box OnOff 2GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Powering the Control Box OnOff

Figure 2 Power OnOff

Control ScreenThe Control Screen displays when you power on the control box It is your interface with the components ofthe P-32 system The Control Screen changes depending on how you have configured the Control Box and theP-32 system

The illustration below shows an example of a Control Box set up to display information from a secondary ControlBox set up for Slope Control

Figure 3 Control Screen

Power OnOff

Button

Startup Screen Shutdown Screen

GC-35

Shutting Down

con1047297g 21

Elevation Set

Point Value

Actual Elevation

Sensor Reading

Slope Set Point Value

PositiveNegative

Slope Indicator Icon

Actual Slope

Sensor Reading

MenuSet

Button Function

Display Area

Elevation Icon

Units (ftincm)

ST-3 SurfaceStringline Mode Icon

Display Slope Box

Auto Icon

Slope Icon

Primary Control Box Display Area

Secondary Control Box

Display Area

Cross Communication

On-Grade Icon

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1123

ccessing the Technicianrsquos Menu 3GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Accessing the Technicianrsquos Menu

1 From the Control Screen press the MenuSet button

2 Rotate the Grade Adjustment Knob to scroll through the menu selections displayed on the screen

3 Select Tech Menu and press and hold the Enter button for three (3) seconds to enter the

Technicianrsquos Menu

Figure 4 Accessing the Technicianrsquos Menu

Press MenuSet Button Turn Grade Adjustment Knob Press and Hold

Enter Button for 3 Seconds

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1223

Technicianrsquos Menu 9GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

bull bull bull bull bull bull

Technicianrsquos Menu

This chapter describes the Technicianrsquos Menu items and their default factory settings

Table 1 lists the available menus

Table 1 Technicianrsquos Menu Settings

Menu Item Range Default Factory Setting

Configuration External 0ndash31 Custom External

Averaging 1 ndash 100 50

Valve Type Solenoid ProportionalDanfoss Pulse WidthModulated

Proportional

Valve Drive Sink Source Sink

Dither Amplitude 0ndash15 4

Dither Frequency 0ndash105 42

Frequency 1ndash13Hz

225ndash1950Hz

5Hz

Max Current 067ndash48 Amps 175 Amps

Hour Read only Hours 00

Hours Auto 00

External Auto On Off Invert Off

Auto Power Up (Paver only) On Off On

Esup2 Reset Cancel Reset Cancel

Lock Menu Level 1 - Unlocked

Level 2 - Moderate

Level 3 - Restricted

Level 1 - Unlocked

Elevation Gains Raise 1 ndash 200 Raise 25

Lower 1 ndash 200 Lower 25

Slope Gain 1 ndash 100 25

Valve Offsets Raise 1 ndash 999 Raise 135

Lower 1 ndash 999 Lower 135

Elevation Deadband 1 ndash 30 mm 3 mm

Slope Deadband 0025 ndash 075 0075

Working Window 0ndash500 Off 020 ft

Slope Working Window 01-100 20

Smartlink Slope 0 - 100 Slope 0

Elevation 0 - 100 Elevation 0

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1323

onfiguration 10GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Configuration

This setting selects a valve drive configuration and has up to 32 preprogrammed configurations to select from You may also create a custom configuration

Configuration Value Range External 0-31 Custom

Default External

bull External ndash Upon power up the control box looks for an external configuration resistor between pins Land K of the 11 pin bulkhead connector and defaults to the listed configuration table for valve control

The configuration number displays on the control box LCD when the box is turned onbull Value between 0-31 ndash The control box defaults to the valve control parameters for this number listed inthe configuration chart (see Table 2 on page 10) The configuration number displays on the control boxLCD when the box is turned on

bull Custom ndash Create a custom valve control configuration by setting the Valve Type Current DirectionCurrent Limit Frequency (for PWM modes and Solenoid) Dither Amplitude (except Solenoid mode) andDither Frequency (except Solenoid mode)

Configuration Codes

Table 2 lists available configurations

Table 2 Configuration Codes

ConfigResistor

(ohms)

Drive Type Current Direction Dither Amplitude Dither Freq Freq Hz Current Limit

0 0 Sol Sink None None Adj None

1 77

2 160

3 249

4 341

5 441 Sol Source None None Adj None

6 560 Sol Source None None Adj None

7 670

8 800 Sol Source None None Adj None

9 940 Sol Source None None Adj None10 1100 Sol Sink None None Adj None

11 1260 Sol Source None None Adj

12 1445

14 1890

15 2140 Pro Cur Source 6 42 NA 175A

17 2760 Sol Sink None None Adj None

18 3140 Sol Sink None None Adj None

19 3583 Sol Source None None Adj None

20 4104 Sol Sink None None Adj None

21 4725 Sol Sink None None Adj None

22 5480 Sol

23 6414

26 11310 Sol Source None None Adj None

27 14440

28 19440

29 28670

30 51500 Pro Cur Source 12 42 NA 175A

31 open Pro Cur Sink 6 42 NA 175A

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1423

veraging 11GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Averaging

Averaging changes the amount of dampening or filtering applied to the laser receiver or elevation sensormeasurements Averaging can be thought of as the time period over which a running average of the elevationmeasurement is calculated

Averaging Value Range 1ndash100

Default 50

A lower value averages fewer elevation measurements allowing the system to react more quickly to grade

changes

A larger value averages more elevation measurements making the system less reactive to fluctuations in gradesuch as with laser ldquobeam bouncerdquo on windy days

Valve Type

Valve Type allows you to select the type of valves used on your machine

Valve Type Value Range Solenoid Servo Proportional Danfoss Pulse PWMDefault Proportional

The following sections describe each of these valve types

Proportional Current

Proportional Current provides a current regulated proportional output and is the preferred setting forproportional valves

A percentage of the total current setting is calculated based on the gain setting and given grade correctionProportional Current control applies full machine voltage to the valve coil until the desired current is reachedthen the voltage is turned off When the current drops below the desired value the process is repeated

Proportional Pulse Width Modulated

Proportional Pulse Width Modulated provides a pulse width regulated proportional output

A percentage of the total duty cycle is calculated based on the gain setting and the given grade correction PulseWidth Modulation cycles the output voltage on and off at the desired duty cycle

Solenoid

Solenoid operates the same as PWM mode except set up specifically for the lower frequency solenoid valves

Danfoss

Danfoss provides a proportional voltage output to drive the specific requirements of the Danfoss brand ofproportional valves In this mode switched power (Vsw) and ground connect to the Danfoss valve through thevalve cable and the Raise output pin of the control box controls the reference signal to the valve In a neutral(no grade) correction output the reference signal is held at half of the switched voltage For example if a 12volt system produced 13 volts on the Vsw line 65 volts are held on the reference output for a no correctionsignal

bull For a raise correction signal the control box increases the reference voltage from 65 to a maximum of975 V

Averaging does not affect slope control

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1523

alve Drive 12GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

bull For a lower output signal the control box decreases the reference voltage to a minimum of 325 V

Valve Drive

Valve Drive selects the current direction of the valves on the machine

Valve Drive Value Range Sink Source

Select Sink if the valve has a permanent positive connection and needs a switched negative connection (thecontrol box sinks current)

Select Source if the valve has a permanent ground (negative) connection and needs a switched positiveconnection (the control box sources current)

Dither Amplitude

Dither Amplitude allows you to select the amount of dither to apply to the valve

Dither is a continuous low frequency ldquopulserdquo applied to the valve drive signal for proportional valves to keep thevalversquos spool from sticking

Dither Amplitude Value Range 0ndash15

Dither Amplitude is a percentage of full current for the Proportional Current valve type or duty cycle for thePWM valve type Dither does not apply for Solenoid Danfoss or Servo valve types

Dither Frequency

Dither Frequency adjusts the frequency of the dither in cycles per second

Dither Frequency Value Range 0ndash105 Hz

Frequency

Frequency adjusts the number of pulses sent to control valves in one secondFrequency Value Range 1ndash13 Hz 225ndash1950 Hz

The frequency value is adjustable from 1 to 13 Hz for Solenoid valves On Pulse Width Modulated mode valvesthe range is 225 to 1950 Hz

Max Current

Max Current adjusts the maximum valve drive current that the control box outputs when using ProportionalCurrent valve output mode and the over-current trip level for other valve types

Current Limit Value Range 067ndash48 Amps

If a Danfoss valve sees a reference voltage greater than 75 of Vsw or below 25 of Vsw the valvedefaults to an ldquoerrorrdquo state and the valve is held in the neutral position

Frequency does not apply for Proportional Current and Danfoss valve types

Changing the Frequency has an effect on the Offset Check the Offset after changing theFrequency

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1623

our 13GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Hour

Hour displays the amount of hours the control box has been operating and the amount of hours the control boxhas been operating in Automatic

Hour Settings No settings (read only)

External Auto

External Auto disables or enables an external automanual switch

External Auto Settings OnOffInvert

If On is selected the system requires both an external AM switch and activation of the Control Boxrsquos Autobutton to switch the system in and out of Automatic control Activate the external AM switch by connectingpin E of the 11 PIN bulkhead to ground

If you select Invert connecting pin E to ground takes the system out of Automatic control Automatic controlactivates only when pin E is connected to power such as when connecting to an in-motion switch

Auto Power (Paver Only)

The Auto Power setting allows the system to automatically power up to the last used mode

Auto Power Settings OnOff

When the Auto Power setting is On the system powers up in the last mode seen before power down (Auto orManual) For example the paver is in automatic control is shut down and then powered up once more Thepaver is now ready to pave in Auto

When the Auto Power setting is Off the operator must press the Auto button to return to Auto after a powerdown

Esup2 Reset

Esup2 Reset reconfigures the system to factory settings

Esup2 Reset Settings Range CancelReset

To reset all settings in the Performance Menu and the Technician Menu to factory defaults select Reset and press and hold the Enter button for three (3) seconds

To cancel and return to the previous screen select Cancel

Lock Menu

The Lock-Out Setting allows certain Performance Settings in the Performance Menu to be made inaccessibleto the operator (see ldquoPaver Lock Menu Settingsrdquo on page 14)

If the Auto Power setting is On the machine powers up in Auto any time it was shut down in AutoOnly use Auto Power On in asphalt paver applications

Setting Auto Power to On for a machine other than asphalt pavers is not recommended Seriousinjury to operators or bystanders from unexpected machine movement could result

If you select Reset the Control Box reverts your custom Control Box settings back to their factorydefault values

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1723

levation Gains (Raise and Lower) 14GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Lock-Out Value Range Level 1 - Unlocked Level2 - Moderate Level 3 - Restricted

bull Level 1 ndash all Performance Menu items are accessible to the operator

bull Level 2ndash some items no longer appear in the Performance Menu and are only accessible in theTechnicianrsquos Menu

bull Level 3 ndash additional items no longer appear in the Performance Menu and are only accessible in theTechnicianrsquos Menu

Lock Menu Settings

Table 3 lists the settings that can be locked out (made unavailable)

Elevation Gains (Raise and Lower)

Elevation Gains determines the speed at which your Topcon P-32 System allows the tow point cylinders to adjustto a change in elevation For faster hydraulic response increase the gain value For slower hydraulic responsedecrease the gain value

The objective is to set the gain so the screed reacts to the change in grade quickly but without ldquoovershootingrdquothe new elevation

Gain Elevation Value Range 1-200

Table 3 Paver Lock Menu Settings

Performance Menu Item Level 1 - Unlocked Level 2 - Moderate Level 3 - Restricted

1 Elevation Gains Available Available Locked

2 Slope Gain Available Available Locked

3 Valve Offsets Available Available Locked

4 Elevation Deadband Available Locked Locked

5 Slope Deadband Available Locked Locked

6 Averaging Available Locked Locked

7 Machine Type Available Available Available

8 Display Available Available Available

9 Units Available Available Available

10 System Info Available Available Available

11 Sonic Tracker 3 Available Available Available

12 Slope Resolution Available Available Available

13 Slope Cal Block Available Available Locked

14 Tech Menu Available Available Available

Before setting the Elevation Gain make sure the machines hydraulic flow controls valves are adjustedfor proper cylinder speed according to the manufacturers recommendations

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1823

lope Gain 15GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Slope Gain

This setting determines the speed at which your Topcon P-32 System allows the tow point cylinders to adjustto a change in slope For faster hydraulic response increase the gain value For slower hydraulic responsedecrease the gain value

The objective is to set the gain so the screed reacts to the change in grade quickly but without ldquoovershootingrdquoOn-Grade Slope Gain should not be set at a higher value than the Elevation Gain on the other side of the paver

Gain Elevation Value Range 1-100

Valve Offsets (Raise and Lower)

Valve Offsets is the minimum amount of electrical signals sent to the valve which causes the hydraulic cylinderto move If the valve offset is too small the sensor will not reach On-Grade Likewise if the valve offset valueis too large the sensor will move too much and overshoot On-Grade

Run the Paver until the hydraulic oil is at normal operating temperature before setting the valve offsets Oncethey are set you should not need to readjust the valve offsets unless the Control Box is moved to a new paveror the hydraulic performance changes

Valve Offset Value Range (Raise and Lower) 1 - 999

Elevation Deadband

Elevation Deadband is the area of the Working Window that is On-Grade While the reference is within that areathe paverrsquos valves are idle (closed) Therefore the wider the Elevation Deadband (On-Grade area) the more areference can move up or down without a correction being initiated Once the signal from the reference is outof the deadband your control box drives the hydraulics to place the reference back in the center of thedeadband

Deadband Elevation Value Range 1ndash30 mm

Before setting the Slope Gain ensure the machines hydraulic flow control valves are adjusted forproper cylinder speed according to the manufacturers recommendations

Do not set slope gain at a higher value than the elevation gain on the other side of the paver A highervalue may cause the slope to be over reactive

Set the Valve Offsets before adjusting elevation and slope gains and averaging

The offset value on one side of the paver may differ from the offset value on the other side of thepaver You must verify the offset values before swapping boxes Use the ldquoLeftrdquo and ldquoRightrdquo labelsprovided

Never attempt to use Valve Offsets to compensate for a slower raise or lower speed of your hydraulicvalves as it causes undershooting or overshooting in Slope Mode and can adversely affect the qualityof the mat

Select the amount of Elevation Deadband carefully Too small of an Elevation Deadband causes thetow point cylinder to constantly hunt up and down while the sensor tries to find On-Grade Too largeof an Elevation Deadband does not allow the sensor to send grade corrections to the values causingunwanted variations in mat thickness

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1923

lope Deadband 16GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Slope Deadband

Slope Deadband defines the size of the on-grade area where no valve corrections are made

Deadband Slope Value Range 0025ndash075

The wider the Slope Deadband the greater the slope can vary without initiating a correction

For example if the operator is grading at a 20 slope and the Slope Deadband is set at 10 the system

reads on-grade anywhere from 195 slope to 205 slope The lower the percentage the tighter the SlopeDeadband

Once the slope signal is out of the Slope Deadband System Five drives the hydraulics back within the SlopeDeadband

Working Window Adjustment

Working Window Adjustment adjusts the working window of the sonic tracker (Figure 5)

Working Window Settings 0ndash500 Off

Default 020

The default setting is 020 which gives 020 ft (61 mm) above and below on-grade Setting the value to Offcompletely disables the working window and allows any target to be seen

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 2023

lope Working Window 17GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Figure 5 Sonic Tracker Working Window

Slope Working Window

Slope Working Window adjusts the working window of the Slope Sensor (Figure 6)

Slope Working Window Value Range 01 - 100 Off

Default 20

The default setting is 20 which gives 20 slope above and below ongrade Setting the value to Off completelydisables the working window

Out of Range

Ongrade

Flashing UpDown Arrow

Solid UpDown Arrow

20rsquo

20rsquo

20rsquo

20rsquo

Working

Window

(Adjustable)

ST-3 Sonic Tracker II

When using the Sonic Tracker II to follow a stringline curb or other elevated reference there is adanger of making an unwanted cut if the Trackerrsquos sonic cone moves away from the target This canoccur if the working window is either off or set as high as the distance between the reference and theground Setting the working window to the default value of 20 (020ft) prevents the automatic controlfrom making such a reaction due to a loss of the target

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 2123

martlink (Elevation and Slope) 18GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Figure 6 Slope Working Window

Smartlink (Elevation and Slope)

Smartlink allows the Control Box to send a percentage of the slopeelevation correction on one side of themachine to the Control Box on the other side of the machine preemptively raising or lowering that hydrauliccylinder to keep the machine at the correct grade Smartlink decreases the lag in correction that can occur onone side of the machine as the second Control Box begins moving the valve without having to wait for thesensor on the other side of the machine to detect and correct for a change in elevationslope

Smartlink Value Range 0 - 100

Default 0

Out of Range

Working Window (Adjustable)

Ongrade

20

20

Ongrade

20

20

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 2223

Warranty 19GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

bull bull bull bull bull bull

Warranty

Topcon laser and electronic positioning equipment are guaranteed against defective material and workmanshipunder normal use and application consistent with this Manual The equipment is guaranteed for the period indicatedon the warranty card accompanying the product starting from the date that the product is sold to the originalpurchaser by Topconrsquos Authorized Dealers1

During the warranty period Topcon will at its option repair or replace this product at no additional charge Repairparts and replacement products will be furnished on an exchange basis and will be either reconditioned or new Thislimited warranty does not include service to repair damage to the product resulting from an accident disastermisuses abuse or modification of the product

Warranty service may be obtained from an authorized Topcon warranty service dealer If this product is deliveredby mail purchaser agrees to insure the product or assume the risk of loss or damage in transit to prepay shippingcharges to the warranty service location and to use the original shipping container or equivalent A letter shouldaccompany the package furnishing a description of the problem andor defect

The purchaserrsquos sole remedy shall be replacement as provided above In no event shall Topcon be liable for anydamages or other claim including any claim for lost profits lost savings or other incidental or consequential damagesarising out of the use of or inability to use the product

1 The warranty against defects in a Topcon battery charger or cable is 90 days

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 2323

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 623

Preface iiGC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

bull bull bull bull bull bull

Preface

Thank you for purchasing this Topcon product The materials available in this Manual (the ldquoManualrdquo) have been preparedby Topcon Positioning Systems Inc (ldquoTPSrdquo) for owners of Topcon products and are designed to assist owners with theuse of the product and its use is subject to these terms and conditions (the ldquoTerms and Conditionsrdquo)

Terms and Conditions

Use

This product is designed to be used by a professional The user should have a good knowledge of the safe use of theproduct and implement the types of safety procedures recommended by the local government protection agency for bothprivate use and commercial job sites

Copyrights

All information contained in this Manual is the intellectual property of and copyrighted material of TPS All rights arereserved Do not use access copy store display create derivative works of sell modify publish distribute or allow anythird party access to any graphics content information or data in this Manual without TPSrsquo express written consent andmay only use such information for the care and operation of the product The information and data in this Manual are avaluable asset of TPS and are developed by the expenditure of considerable work time and money and are the result oforiginal selection coordination and arrangement by TPS

Trademarks

HiPer SRtrade TRUtrade Magnettrade Pocket-3Dtrade Topconreg and Topcon Positioning Systemstrade are trademarks or registeredtrademarks of TPS Windowsreg is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation The Bluetoothreg word mark and logosare owned by Bluetooth SIG Inc and any use of such marks by Topcon Positioning Systems Inc is used under licenseOther product and company names mentioned herein may be trademarks of their respective owners

Disclaimer of Warranty

EXCEPT FOR ANY WARRANTIES IN AN APPENDIX OR A WARRANTY CARD ACCOMPANYING THE PRODUCT THIS MANUAL AND THE PRODUCT ARE PROVIDED ldquoAS-ISrdquo THERE ARE NO OTHER WARRANTIES TPS DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIEDWARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR USE OR PURPOSE TPS AND ITS DISTRIBUTORSSHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR TECHNICAL OR EDITORIAL ERRORS OR OMISSIONS CONTAINED HEREIN NOR FORINCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM THE FURNISHING PERFORMANCE OR USE OF THIS

MATERIAL OR THE PRODUCT SUCH DISCLAIMED DAMAGES INCLUDE BUT ARE NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF TIME LOSSOR DESTRUCTION OF DATA LOSS OF PROFIT SAVINGS OR REVENUE OR LOSS OF THE PRODUCTrsquoS USE IN ADDITIONTPS IS NOT RESPONSIBLE OR LIABLE FOR DAMAGES OR COSTS INCURRED IN CONNECTION WITH OBTAININGSUBSTITUTE PRODUCTS OR SOFTWARE CLAIMS BY OTHERS INCONVENIENCE OR ANY OTHER COSTS IN ANY EVENTTPS SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES OR OTHERWISE TO YOU OR ANY OTHER PERSON OR ENTITY IN EXCESSOF THE PURCHASE PRICE FOR THE PRODUCT

Please read the terms and conditions carefully

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 723

erms and Conditions ivGC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

License Agreement

Use of any computer programs or software supplied by TPS or downloaded from a TPS website (the ldquoSoftwarerdquo) inconnection with the product constitutes acceptance of these Terms and Conditions in this Manual and an agreementto abide by these Terms and Conditions The user is granted a personal non-exclusive non-transferable license touse such Software under the terms stated herein and in any case only with a single product You may not assign ortransfer the Software or this license without the express written consent of TPS This license is effective untilterminated You may terminate the license at any time by destroying the Software and Manual TPS may terminatethe license if you fail to comply with any of the Terms or Conditions You agree to destroy the Software and manual

upon termination of the use of the product All ownership copyright and other intellectual property rights in and tothe Software belong to TPS If these license terms are not acceptable return any unused software and manual

Confidentiality

This Manual its contents and the Software (collectively the ldquoConfidential Informationrdquo) are the confidential andproprietary information of TPS You agree to treat TPSrsquo Confidential Information with a degree of care no less stringentthat the degree of care you would use in safeguarding your own most valuable trade secrets Nothing in this paragraphshall restrict you from disclosing Confidential Information to your employees as may be necessary or appropriate tooperate or care for the product Such employees must also keep the Confidentiality Information confidential In theevent you become legally compelled to disclose any of the Confidential Information you shall give TPS immediatenotice so that it may seek a protective order or other appropriate remedy

Website Other Statements

No statement contained at the TPS website (or any other website) or in any other advertisements or TPS literatureor made by an employee or independent contractor of TPS modifies these Terms and Conditions (including theSoftware license warranty and limitation of liability)

Safety

Improper use of the product can lead to injury to persons or property andor malfunction of the product The productshould only be repaired by authorized TPS warranty service centers Users should review and heed the safety warnings

in an Appendix

Miscellaneous

The above Terms and Conditions may be amended modified superseded or canceled at any time by TPS The aboveTerms and Conditions will be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of Californiawithout reference to conflict of laws

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 823

Manual Conventions vGC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Manual Conventions

This manual uses the following conventions

Convention Description Example

Bold Menu or drop-down menu item File Exit (Click the File menu and clickExit)

Name of a dialog box or screen From the Connection screen

Button or key commands Click Finish

Mono User supplied text or variable Type guest and click Enter

Italic Reference to another manual or help document Refer to the Topcon Reference Manual

Further information to note about system configuration maintenance or setup

Supplementary information that can have an adverse affect on system operation systemperformance data integrity measurements or personal safety

Notification that an action has the potential to result in system damage loss of data loss ofwarranty or personal injury

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 923

Introduction 1GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

bull bull bull bull bull bull

Introduction

The Technicians Menu contains additional system menu items not available to the operator (end user) in the GC-35 Control Box Performance Menu

These menu items offer the ability to override default settings of the P-32 system to improve system performancein certain situations These menu items are not however meant to be changed by the operator

The following sections describe the features of the GC-35 control box and explain how to access the TechnicianrsquosMenu select a menu item save the new value and exit the Technicianrsquos Menu

Features

Figure 1 GC-35 Control Box

Access to the Technicianrsquos Menu is intended for and should be limited to Topcon qualified dealerand field service technicians Any changes to the factory default settings without a thoroughunderstanding to their effects on the P-32 system may cause adverse consequences to systemaccuracy and operation

Auto Indicator LED

Auto Button

Survey Button

Elevation Indicator

LED (Green)

Slope Indicator

LED (Yellow)

SlopeElevation

Button

Jog UpDown

Buttons

LCD

Light Sensor

Power OnOff

Button

Grade Adjustment

Knob

Grade Adjustment

Arrows

Menu Selection

Buttons

Grade Indicator

LEDs

USB Port

USB Cap

(Removed)

Jaw Mount

Power Connector

Sonic Tracker or Slope Sensor

Connectors

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1023

owering the Control Box OnOff 2GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Powering the Control Box OnOff

Figure 2 Power OnOff

Control ScreenThe Control Screen displays when you power on the control box It is your interface with the components ofthe P-32 system The Control Screen changes depending on how you have configured the Control Box and theP-32 system

The illustration below shows an example of a Control Box set up to display information from a secondary ControlBox set up for Slope Control

Figure 3 Control Screen

Power OnOff

Button

Startup Screen Shutdown Screen

GC-35

Shutting Down

con1047297g 21

Elevation Set

Point Value

Actual Elevation

Sensor Reading

Slope Set Point Value

PositiveNegative

Slope Indicator Icon

Actual Slope

Sensor Reading

MenuSet

Button Function

Display Area

Elevation Icon

Units (ftincm)

ST-3 SurfaceStringline Mode Icon

Display Slope Box

Auto Icon

Slope Icon

Primary Control Box Display Area

Secondary Control Box

Display Area

Cross Communication

On-Grade Icon

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1123

ccessing the Technicianrsquos Menu 3GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Accessing the Technicianrsquos Menu

1 From the Control Screen press the MenuSet button

2 Rotate the Grade Adjustment Knob to scroll through the menu selections displayed on the screen

3 Select Tech Menu and press and hold the Enter button for three (3) seconds to enter the

Technicianrsquos Menu

Figure 4 Accessing the Technicianrsquos Menu

Press MenuSet Button Turn Grade Adjustment Knob Press and Hold

Enter Button for 3 Seconds

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1223

Technicianrsquos Menu 9GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

bull bull bull bull bull bull

Technicianrsquos Menu

This chapter describes the Technicianrsquos Menu items and their default factory settings

Table 1 lists the available menus

Table 1 Technicianrsquos Menu Settings

Menu Item Range Default Factory Setting

Configuration External 0ndash31 Custom External

Averaging 1 ndash 100 50

Valve Type Solenoid ProportionalDanfoss Pulse WidthModulated

Proportional

Valve Drive Sink Source Sink

Dither Amplitude 0ndash15 4

Dither Frequency 0ndash105 42

Frequency 1ndash13Hz

225ndash1950Hz

5Hz

Max Current 067ndash48 Amps 175 Amps

Hour Read only Hours 00

Hours Auto 00

External Auto On Off Invert Off

Auto Power Up (Paver only) On Off On

Esup2 Reset Cancel Reset Cancel

Lock Menu Level 1 - Unlocked

Level 2 - Moderate

Level 3 - Restricted

Level 1 - Unlocked

Elevation Gains Raise 1 ndash 200 Raise 25

Lower 1 ndash 200 Lower 25

Slope Gain 1 ndash 100 25

Valve Offsets Raise 1 ndash 999 Raise 135

Lower 1 ndash 999 Lower 135

Elevation Deadband 1 ndash 30 mm 3 mm

Slope Deadband 0025 ndash 075 0075

Working Window 0ndash500 Off 020 ft

Slope Working Window 01-100 20

Smartlink Slope 0 - 100 Slope 0

Elevation 0 - 100 Elevation 0

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1323

onfiguration 10GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Configuration

This setting selects a valve drive configuration and has up to 32 preprogrammed configurations to select from You may also create a custom configuration

Configuration Value Range External 0-31 Custom

Default External

bull External ndash Upon power up the control box looks for an external configuration resistor between pins Land K of the 11 pin bulkhead connector and defaults to the listed configuration table for valve control

The configuration number displays on the control box LCD when the box is turned onbull Value between 0-31 ndash The control box defaults to the valve control parameters for this number listed inthe configuration chart (see Table 2 on page 10) The configuration number displays on the control boxLCD when the box is turned on

bull Custom ndash Create a custom valve control configuration by setting the Valve Type Current DirectionCurrent Limit Frequency (for PWM modes and Solenoid) Dither Amplitude (except Solenoid mode) andDither Frequency (except Solenoid mode)

Configuration Codes

Table 2 lists available configurations

Table 2 Configuration Codes

ConfigResistor

(ohms)

Drive Type Current Direction Dither Amplitude Dither Freq Freq Hz Current Limit

0 0 Sol Sink None None Adj None

1 77

2 160

3 249

4 341

5 441 Sol Source None None Adj None

6 560 Sol Source None None Adj None

7 670

8 800 Sol Source None None Adj None

9 940 Sol Source None None Adj None10 1100 Sol Sink None None Adj None

11 1260 Sol Source None None Adj

12 1445

14 1890

15 2140 Pro Cur Source 6 42 NA 175A

17 2760 Sol Sink None None Adj None

18 3140 Sol Sink None None Adj None

19 3583 Sol Source None None Adj None

20 4104 Sol Sink None None Adj None

21 4725 Sol Sink None None Adj None

22 5480 Sol

23 6414

26 11310 Sol Source None None Adj None

27 14440

28 19440

29 28670

30 51500 Pro Cur Source 12 42 NA 175A

31 open Pro Cur Sink 6 42 NA 175A

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1423

veraging 11GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Averaging

Averaging changes the amount of dampening or filtering applied to the laser receiver or elevation sensormeasurements Averaging can be thought of as the time period over which a running average of the elevationmeasurement is calculated

Averaging Value Range 1ndash100

Default 50

A lower value averages fewer elevation measurements allowing the system to react more quickly to grade

changes

A larger value averages more elevation measurements making the system less reactive to fluctuations in gradesuch as with laser ldquobeam bouncerdquo on windy days

Valve Type

Valve Type allows you to select the type of valves used on your machine

Valve Type Value Range Solenoid Servo Proportional Danfoss Pulse PWMDefault Proportional

The following sections describe each of these valve types

Proportional Current

Proportional Current provides a current regulated proportional output and is the preferred setting forproportional valves

A percentage of the total current setting is calculated based on the gain setting and given grade correctionProportional Current control applies full machine voltage to the valve coil until the desired current is reachedthen the voltage is turned off When the current drops below the desired value the process is repeated

Proportional Pulse Width Modulated

Proportional Pulse Width Modulated provides a pulse width regulated proportional output

A percentage of the total duty cycle is calculated based on the gain setting and the given grade correction PulseWidth Modulation cycles the output voltage on and off at the desired duty cycle

Solenoid

Solenoid operates the same as PWM mode except set up specifically for the lower frequency solenoid valves

Danfoss

Danfoss provides a proportional voltage output to drive the specific requirements of the Danfoss brand ofproportional valves In this mode switched power (Vsw) and ground connect to the Danfoss valve through thevalve cable and the Raise output pin of the control box controls the reference signal to the valve In a neutral(no grade) correction output the reference signal is held at half of the switched voltage For example if a 12volt system produced 13 volts on the Vsw line 65 volts are held on the reference output for a no correctionsignal

bull For a raise correction signal the control box increases the reference voltage from 65 to a maximum of975 V

Averaging does not affect slope control

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1523

alve Drive 12GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

bull For a lower output signal the control box decreases the reference voltage to a minimum of 325 V

Valve Drive

Valve Drive selects the current direction of the valves on the machine

Valve Drive Value Range Sink Source

Select Sink if the valve has a permanent positive connection and needs a switched negative connection (thecontrol box sinks current)

Select Source if the valve has a permanent ground (negative) connection and needs a switched positiveconnection (the control box sources current)

Dither Amplitude

Dither Amplitude allows you to select the amount of dither to apply to the valve

Dither is a continuous low frequency ldquopulserdquo applied to the valve drive signal for proportional valves to keep thevalversquos spool from sticking

Dither Amplitude Value Range 0ndash15

Dither Amplitude is a percentage of full current for the Proportional Current valve type or duty cycle for thePWM valve type Dither does not apply for Solenoid Danfoss or Servo valve types

Dither Frequency

Dither Frequency adjusts the frequency of the dither in cycles per second

Dither Frequency Value Range 0ndash105 Hz

Frequency

Frequency adjusts the number of pulses sent to control valves in one secondFrequency Value Range 1ndash13 Hz 225ndash1950 Hz

The frequency value is adjustable from 1 to 13 Hz for Solenoid valves On Pulse Width Modulated mode valvesthe range is 225 to 1950 Hz

Max Current

Max Current adjusts the maximum valve drive current that the control box outputs when using ProportionalCurrent valve output mode and the over-current trip level for other valve types

Current Limit Value Range 067ndash48 Amps

If a Danfoss valve sees a reference voltage greater than 75 of Vsw or below 25 of Vsw the valvedefaults to an ldquoerrorrdquo state and the valve is held in the neutral position

Frequency does not apply for Proportional Current and Danfoss valve types

Changing the Frequency has an effect on the Offset Check the Offset after changing theFrequency

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1623

our 13GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Hour

Hour displays the amount of hours the control box has been operating and the amount of hours the control boxhas been operating in Automatic

Hour Settings No settings (read only)

External Auto

External Auto disables or enables an external automanual switch

External Auto Settings OnOffInvert

If On is selected the system requires both an external AM switch and activation of the Control Boxrsquos Autobutton to switch the system in and out of Automatic control Activate the external AM switch by connectingpin E of the 11 PIN bulkhead to ground

If you select Invert connecting pin E to ground takes the system out of Automatic control Automatic controlactivates only when pin E is connected to power such as when connecting to an in-motion switch

Auto Power (Paver Only)

The Auto Power setting allows the system to automatically power up to the last used mode

Auto Power Settings OnOff

When the Auto Power setting is On the system powers up in the last mode seen before power down (Auto orManual) For example the paver is in automatic control is shut down and then powered up once more Thepaver is now ready to pave in Auto

When the Auto Power setting is Off the operator must press the Auto button to return to Auto after a powerdown

Esup2 Reset

Esup2 Reset reconfigures the system to factory settings

Esup2 Reset Settings Range CancelReset

To reset all settings in the Performance Menu and the Technician Menu to factory defaults select Reset and press and hold the Enter button for three (3) seconds

To cancel and return to the previous screen select Cancel

Lock Menu

The Lock-Out Setting allows certain Performance Settings in the Performance Menu to be made inaccessibleto the operator (see ldquoPaver Lock Menu Settingsrdquo on page 14)

If the Auto Power setting is On the machine powers up in Auto any time it was shut down in AutoOnly use Auto Power On in asphalt paver applications

Setting Auto Power to On for a machine other than asphalt pavers is not recommended Seriousinjury to operators or bystanders from unexpected machine movement could result

If you select Reset the Control Box reverts your custom Control Box settings back to their factorydefault values

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1723

levation Gains (Raise and Lower) 14GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Lock-Out Value Range Level 1 - Unlocked Level2 - Moderate Level 3 - Restricted

bull Level 1 ndash all Performance Menu items are accessible to the operator

bull Level 2ndash some items no longer appear in the Performance Menu and are only accessible in theTechnicianrsquos Menu

bull Level 3 ndash additional items no longer appear in the Performance Menu and are only accessible in theTechnicianrsquos Menu

Lock Menu Settings

Table 3 lists the settings that can be locked out (made unavailable)

Elevation Gains (Raise and Lower)

Elevation Gains determines the speed at which your Topcon P-32 System allows the tow point cylinders to adjustto a change in elevation For faster hydraulic response increase the gain value For slower hydraulic responsedecrease the gain value

The objective is to set the gain so the screed reacts to the change in grade quickly but without ldquoovershootingrdquothe new elevation

Gain Elevation Value Range 1-200

Table 3 Paver Lock Menu Settings

Performance Menu Item Level 1 - Unlocked Level 2 - Moderate Level 3 - Restricted

1 Elevation Gains Available Available Locked

2 Slope Gain Available Available Locked

3 Valve Offsets Available Available Locked

4 Elevation Deadband Available Locked Locked

5 Slope Deadband Available Locked Locked

6 Averaging Available Locked Locked

7 Machine Type Available Available Available

8 Display Available Available Available

9 Units Available Available Available

10 System Info Available Available Available

11 Sonic Tracker 3 Available Available Available

12 Slope Resolution Available Available Available

13 Slope Cal Block Available Available Locked

14 Tech Menu Available Available Available

Before setting the Elevation Gain make sure the machines hydraulic flow controls valves are adjustedfor proper cylinder speed according to the manufacturers recommendations

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1823

lope Gain 15GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Slope Gain

This setting determines the speed at which your Topcon P-32 System allows the tow point cylinders to adjustto a change in slope For faster hydraulic response increase the gain value For slower hydraulic responsedecrease the gain value

The objective is to set the gain so the screed reacts to the change in grade quickly but without ldquoovershootingrdquoOn-Grade Slope Gain should not be set at a higher value than the Elevation Gain on the other side of the paver

Gain Elevation Value Range 1-100

Valve Offsets (Raise and Lower)

Valve Offsets is the minimum amount of electrical signals sent to the valve which causes the hydraulic cylinderto move If the valve offset is too small the sensor will not reach On-Grade Likewise if the valve offset valueis too large the sensor will move too much and overshoot On-Grade

Run the Paver until the hydraulic oil is at normal operating temperature before setting the valve offsets Oncethey are set you should not need to readjust the valve offsets unless the Control Box is moved to a new paveror the hydraulic performance changes

Valve Offset Value Range (Raise and Lower) 1 - 999

Elevation Deadband

Elevation Deadband is the area of the Working Window that is On-Grade While the reference is within that areathe paverrsquos valves are idle (closed) Therefore the wider the Elevation Deadband (On-Grade area) the more areference can move up or down without a correction being initiated Once the signal from the reference is outof the deadband your control box drives the hydraulics to place the reference back in the center of thedeadband

Deadband Elevation Value Range 1ndash30 mm

Before setting the Slope Gain ensure the machines hydraulic flow control valves are adjusted forproper cylinder speed according to the manufacturers recommendations

Do not set slope gain at a higher value than the elevation gain on the other side of the paver A highervalue may cause the slope to be over reactive

Set the Valve Offsets before adjusting elevation and slope gains and averaging

The offset value on one side of the paver may differ from the offset value on the other side of thepaver You must verify the offset values before swapping boxes Use the ldquoLeftrdquo and ldquoRightrdquo labelsprovided

Never attempt to use Valve Offsets to compensate for a slower raise or lower speed of your hydraulicvalves as it causes undershooting or overshooting in Slope Mode and can adversely affect the qualityof the mat

Select the amount of Elevation Deadband carefully Too small of an Elevation Deadband causes thetow point cylinder to constantly hunt up and down while the sensor tries to find On-Grade Too largeof an Elevation Deadband does not allow the sensor to send grade corrections to the values causingunwanted variations in mat thickness

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1923

lope Deadband 16GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Slope Deadband

Slope Deadband defines the size of the on-grade area where no valve corrections are made

Deadband Slope Value Range 0025ndash075

The wider the Slope Deadband the greater the slope can vary without initiating a correction

For example if the operator is grading at a 20 slope and the Slope Deadband is set at 10 the system

reads on-grade anywhere from 195 slope to 205 slope The lower the percentage the tighter the SlopeDeadband

Once the slope signal is out of the Slope Deadband System Five drives the hydraulics back within the SlopeDeadband

Working Window Adjustment

Working Window Adjustment adjusts the working window of the sonic tracker (Figure 5)

Working Window Settings 0ndash500 Off

Default 020

The default setting is 020 which gives 020 ft (61 mm) above and below on-grade Setting the value to Offcompletely disables the working window and allows any target to be seen

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 2023

lope Working Window 17GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Figure 5 Sonic Tracker Working Window

Slope Working Window

Slope Working Window adjusts the working window of the Slope Sensor (Figure 6)

Slope Working Window Value Range 01 - 100 Off

Default 20

The default setting is 20 which gives 20 slope above and below ongrade Setting the value to Off completelydisables the working window

Out of Range

Ongrade

Flashing UpDown Arrow

Solid UpDown Arrow

20rsquo

20rsquo

20rsquo

20rsquo

Working

Window

(Adjustable)

ST-3 Sonic Tracker II

When using the Sonic Tracker II to follow a stringline curb or other elevated reference there is adanger of making an unwanted cut if the Trackerrsquos sonic cone moves away from the target This canoccur if the working window is either off or set as high as the distance between the reference and theground Setting the working window to the default value of 20 (020ft) prevents the automatic controlfrom making such a reaction due to a loss of the target

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 2123

martlink (Elevation and Slope) 18GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Figure 6 Slope Working Window

Smartlink (Elevation and Slope)

Smartlink allows the Control Box to send a percentage of the slopeelevation correction on one side of themachine to the Control Box on the other side of the machine preemptively raising or lowering that hydrauliccylinder to keep the machine at the correct grade Smartlink decreases the lag in correction that can occur onone side of the machine as the second Control Box begins moving the valve without having to wait for thesensor on the other side of the machine to detect and correct for a change in elevationslope

Smartlink Value Range 0 - 100

Default 0

Out of Range

Working Window (Adjustable)

Ongrade

20

20

Ongrade

20

20

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 2223

Warranty 19GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

bull bull bull bull bull bull

Warranty

Topcon laser and electronic positioning equipment are guaranteed against defective material and workmanshipunder normal use and application consistent with this Manual The equipment is guaranteed for the period indicatedon the warranty card accompanying the product starting from the date that the product is sold to the originalpurchaser by Topconrsquos Authorized Dealers1

During the warranty period Topcon will at its option repair or replace this product at no additional charge Repairparts and replacement products will be furnished on an exchange basis and will be either reconditioned or new Thislimited warranty does not include service to repair damage to the product resulting from an accident disastermisuses abuse or modification of the product

Warranty service may be obtained from an authorized Topcon warranty service dealer If this product is deliveredby mail purchaser agrees to insure the product or assume the risk of loss or damage in transit to prepay shippingcharges to the warranty service location and to use the original shipping container or equivalent A letter shouldaccompany the package furnishing a description of the problem andor defect

The purchaserrsquos sole remedy shall be replacement as provided above In no event shall Topcon be liable for anydamages or other claim including any claim for lost profits lost savings or other incidental or consequential damagesarising out of the use of or inability to use the product

1 The warranty against defects in a Topcon battery charger or cable is 90 days

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 2323

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 723

erms and Conditions ivGC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

License Agreement

Use of any computer programs or software supplied by TPS or downloaded from a TPS website (the ldquoSoftwarerdquo) inconnection with the product constitutes acceptance of these Terms and Conditions in this Manual and an agreementto abide by these Terms and Conditions The user is granted a personal non-exclusive non-transferable license touse such Software under the terms stated herein and in any case only with a single product You may not assign ortransfer the Software or this license without the express written consent of TPS This license is effective untilterminated You may terminate the license at any time by destroying the Software and Manual TPS may terminatethe license if you fail to comply with any of the Terms or Conditions You agree to destroy the Software and manual

upon termination of the use of the product All ownership copyright and other intellectual property rights in and tothe Software belong to TPS If these license terms are not acceptable return any unused software and manual

Confidentiality

This Manual its contents and the Software (collectively the ldquoConfidential Informationrdquo) are the confidential andproprietary information of TPS You agree to treat TPSrsquo Confidential Information with a degree of care no less stringentthat the degree of care you would use in safeguarding your own most valuable trade secrets Nothing in this paragraphshall restrict you from disclosing Confidential Information to your employees as may be necessary or appropriate tooperate or care for the product Such employees must also keep the Confidentiality Information confidential In theevent you become legally compelled to disclose any of the Confidential Information you shall give TPS immediatenotice so that it may seek a protective order or other appropriate remedy

Website Other Statements

No statement contained at the TPS website (or any other website) or in any other advertisements or TPS literatureor made by an employee or independent contractor of TPS modifies these Terms and Conditions (including theSoftware license warranty and limitation of liability)

Safety

Improper use of the product can lead to injury to persons or property andor malfunction of the product The productshould only be repaired by authorized TPS warranty service centers Users should review and heed the safety warnings

in an Appendix

Miscellaneous

The above Terms and Conditions may be amended modified superseded or canceled at any time by TPS The aboveTerms and Conditions will be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of Californiawithout reference to conflict of laws

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 823

Manual Conventions vGC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Manual Conventions

This manual uses the following conventions

Convention Description Example

Bold Menu or drop-down menu item File Exit (Click the File menu and clickExit)

Name of a dialog box or screen From the Connection screen

Button or key commands Click Finish

Mono User supplied text or variable Type guest and click Enter

Italic Reference to another manual or help document Refer to the Topcon Reference Manual

Further information to note about system configuration maintenance or setup

Supplementary information that can have an adverse affect on system operation systemperformance data integrity measurements or personal safety

Notification that an action has the potential to result in system damage loss of data loss ofwarranty or personal injury

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 923

Introduction 1GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

bull bull bull bull bull bull

Introduction

The Technicians Menu contains additional system menu items not available to the operator (end user) in the GC-35 Control Box Performance Menu

These menu items offer the ability to override default settings of the P-32 system to improve system performancein certain situations These menu items are not however meant to be changed by the operator

The following sections describe the features of the GC-35 control box and explain how to access the TechnicianrsquosMenu select a menu item save the new value and exit the Technicianrsquos Menu

Features

Figure 1 GC-35 Control Box

Access to the Technicianrsquos Menu is intended for and should be limited to Topcon qualified dealerand field service technicians Any changes to the factory default settings without a thoroughunderstanding to their effects on the P-32 system may cause adverse consequences to systemaccuracy and operation

Auto Indicator LED

Auto Button

Survey Button

Elevation Indicator

LED (Green)

Slope Indicator

LED (Yellow)

SlopeElevation

Button

Jog UpDown

Buttons

LCD

Light Sensor

Power OnOff

Button

Grade Adjustment

Knob

Grade Adjustment

Arrows

Menu Selection

Buttons

Grade Indicator

LEDs

USB Port

USB Cap

(Removed)

Jaw Mount

Power Connector

Sonic Tracker or Slope Sensor

Connectors

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1023

owering the Control Box OnOff 2GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Powering the Control Box OnOff

Figure 2 Power OnOff

Control ScreenThe Control Screen displays when you power on the control box It is your interface with the components ofthe P-32 system The Control Screen changes depending on how you have configured the Control Box and theP-32 system

The illustration below shows an example of a Control Box set up to display information from a secondary ControlBox set up for Slope Control

Figure 3 Control Screen

Power OnOff

Button

Startup Screen Shutdown Screen

GC-35

Shutting Down

con1047297g 21

Elevation Set

Point Value

Actual Elevation

Sensor Reading

Slope Set Point Value

PositiveNegative

Slope Indicator Icon

Actual Slope

Sensor Reading

MenuSet

Button Function

Display Area

Elevation Icon

Units (ftincm)

ST-3 SurfaceStringline Mode Icon

Display Slope Box

Auto Icon

Slope Icon

Primary Control Box Display Area

Secondary Control Box

Display Area

Cross Communication

On-Grade Icon

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1123

ccessing the Technicianrsquos Menu 3GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Accessing the Technicianrsquos Menu

1 From the Control Screen press the MenuSet button

2 Rotate the Grade Adjustment Knob to scroll through the menu selections displayed on the screen

3 Select Tech Menu and press and hold the Enter button for three (3) seconds to enter the

Technicianrsquos Menu

Figure 4 Accessing the Technicianrsquos Menu

Press MenuSet Button Turn Grade Adjustment Knob Press and Hold

Enter Button for 3 Seconds

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1223

Technicianrsquos Menu 9GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

bull bull bull bull bull bull

Technicianrsquos Menu

This chapter describes the Technicianrsquos Menu items and their default factory settings

Table 1 lists the available menus

Table 1 Technicianrsquos Menu Settings

Menu Item Range Default Factory Setting

Configuration External 0ndash31 Custom External

Averaging 1 ndash 100 50

Valve Type Solenoid ProportionalDanfoss Pulse WidthModulated

Proportional

Valve Drive Sink Source Sink

Dither Amplitude 0ndash15 4

Dither Frequency 0ndash105 42

Frequency 1ndash13Hz

225ndash1950Hz

5Hz

Max Current 067ndash48 Amps 175 Amps

Hour Read only Hours 00

Hours Auto 00

External Auto On Off Invert Off

Auto Power Up (Paver only) On Off On

Esup2 Reset Cancel Reset Cancel

Lock Menu Level 1 - Unlocked

Level 2 - Moderate

Level 3 - Restricted

Level 1 - Unlocked

Elevation Gains Raise 1 ndash 200 Raise 25

Lower 1 ndash 200 Lower 25

Slope Gain 1 ndash 100 25

Valve Offsets Raise 1 ndash 999 Raise 135

Lower 1 ndash 999 Lower 135

Elevation Deadband 1 ndash 30 mm 3 mm

Slope Deadband 0025 ndash 075 0075

Working Window 0ndash500 Off 020 ft

Slope Working Window 01-100 20

Smartlink Slope 0 - 100 Slope 0

Elevation 0 - 100 Elevation 0

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1323

onfiguration 10GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Configuration

This setting selects a valve drive configuration and has up to 32 preprogrammed configurations to select from You may also create a custom configuration

Configuration Value Range External 0-31 Custom

Default External

bull External ndash Upon power up the control box looks for an external configuration resistor between pins Land K of the 11 pin bulkhead connector and defaults to the listed configuration table for valve control

The configuration number displays on the control box LCD when the box is turned onbull Value between 0-31 ndash The control box defaults to the valve control parameters for this number listed inthe configuration chart (see Table 2 on page 10) The configuration number displays on the control boxLCD when the box is turned on

bull Custom ndash Create a custom valve control configuration by setting the Valve Type Current DirectionCurrent Limit Frequency (for PWM modes and Solenoid) Dither Amplitude (except Solenoid mode) andDither Frequency (except Solenoid mode)

Configuration Codes

Table 2 lists available configurations

Table 2 Configuration Codes

ConfigResistor

(ohms)

Drive Type Current Direction Dither Amplitude Dither Freq Freq Hz Current Limit

0 0 Sol Sink None None Adj None

1 77

2 160

3 249

4 341

5 441 Sol Source None None Adj None

6 560 Sol Source None None Adj None

7 670

8 800 Sol Source None None Adj None

9 940 Sol Source None None Adj None10 1100 Sol Sink None None Adj None

11 1260 Sol Source None None Adj

12 1445

14 1890

15 2140 Pro Cur Source 6 42 NA 175A

17 2760 Sol Sink None None Adj None

18 3140 Sol Sink None None Adj None

19 3583 Sol Source None None Adj None

20 4104 Sol Sink None None Adj None

21 4725 Sol Sink None None Adj None

22 5480 Sol

23 6414

26 11310 Sol Source None None Adj None

27 14440

28 19440

29 28670

30 51500 Pro Cur Source 12 42 NA 175A

31 open Pro Cur Sink 6 42 NA 175A

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1423

veraging 11GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Averaging

Averaging changes the amount of dampening or filtering applied to the laser receiver or elevation sensormeasurements Averaging can be thought of as the time period over which a running average of the elevationmeasurement is calculated

Averaging Value Range 1ndash100

Default 50

A lower value averages fewer elevation measurements allowing the system to react more quickly to grade

changes

A larger value averages more elevation measurements making the system less reactive to fluctuations in gradesuch as with laser ldquobeam bouncerdquo on windy days

Valve Type

Valve Type allows you to select the type of valves used on your machine

Valve Type Value Range Solenoid Servo Proportional Danfoss Pulse PWMDefault Proportional

The following sections describe each of these valve types

Proportional Current

Proportional Current provides a current regulated proportional output and is the preferred setting forproportional valves

A percentage of the total current setting is calculated based on the gain setting and given grade correctionProportional Current control applies full machine voltage to the valve coil until the desired current is reachedthen the voltage is turned off When the current drops below the desired value the process is repeated

Proportional Pulse Width Modulated

Proportional Pulse Width Modulated provides a pulse width regulated proportional output

A percentage of the total duty cycle is calculated based on the gain setting and the given grade correction PulseWidth Modulation cycles the output voltage on and off at the desired duty cycle

Solenoid

Solenoid operates the same as PWM mode except set up specifically for the lower frequency solenoid valves

Danfoss

Danfoss provides a proportional voltage output to drive the specific requirements of the Danfoss brand ofproportional valves In this mode switched power (Vsw) and ground connect to the Danfoss valve through thevalve cable and the Raise output pin of the control box controls the reference signal to the valve In a neutral(no grade) correction output the reference signal is held at half of the switched voltage For example if a 12volt system produced 13 volts on the Vsw line 65 volts are held on the reference output for a no correctionsignal

bull For a raise correction signal the control box increases the reference voltage from 65 to a maximum of975 V

Averaging does not affect slope control

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1523

alve Drive 12GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

bull For a lower output signal the control box decreases the reference voltage to a minimum of 325 V

Valve Drive

Valve Drive selects the current direction of the valves on the machine

Valve Drive Value Range Sink Source

Select Sink if the valve has a permanent positive connection and needs a switched negative connection (thecontrol box sinks current)

Select Source if the valve has a permanent ground (negative) connection and needs a switched positiveconnection (the control box sources current)

Dither Amplitude

Dither Amplitude allows you to select the amount of dither to apply to the valve

Dither is a continuous low frequency ldquopulserdquo applied to the valve drive signal for proportional valves to keep thevalversquos spool from sticking

Dither Amplitude Value Range 0ndash15

Dither Amplitude is a percentage of full current for the Proportional Current valve type or duty cycle for thePWM valve type Dither does not apply for Solenoid Danfoss or Servo valve types

Dither Frequency

Dither Frequency adjusts the frequency of the dither in cycles per second

Dither Frequency Value Range 0ndash105 Hz

Frequency

Frequency adjusts the number of pulses sent to control valves in one secondFrequency Value Range 1ndash13 Hz 225ndash1950 Hz

The frequency value is adjustable from 1 to 13 Hz for Solenoid valves On Pulse Width Modulated mode valvesthe range is 225 to 1950 Hz

Max Current

Max Current adjusts the maximum valve drive current that the control box outputs when using ProportionalCurrent valve output mode and the over-current trip level for other valve types

Current Limit Value Range 067ndash48 Amps

If a Danfoss valve sees a reference voltage greater than 75 of Vsw or below 25 of Vsw the valvedefaults to an ldquoerrorrdquo state and the valve is held in the neutral position

Frequency does not apply for Proportional Current and Danfoss valve types

Changing the Frequency has an effect on the Offset Check the Offset after changing theFrequency

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1623

our 13GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Hour

Hour displays the amount of hours the control box has been operating and the amount of hours the control boxhas been operating in Automatic

Hour Settings No settings (read only)

External Auto

External Auto disables or enables an external automanual switch

External Auto Settings OnOffInvert

If On is selected the system requires both an external AM switch and activation of the Control Boxrsquos Autobutton to switch the system in and out of Automatic control Activate the external AM switch by connectingpin E of the 11 PIN bulkhead to ground

If you select Invert connecting pin E to ground takes the system out of Automatic control Automatic controlactivates only when pin E is connected to power such as when connecting to an in-motion switch

Auto Power (Paver Only)

The Auto Power setting allows the system to automatically power up to the last used mode

Auto Power Settings OnOff

When the Auto Power setting is On the system powers up in the last mode seen before power down (Auto orManual) For example the paver is in automatic control is shut down and then powered up once more Thepaver is now ready to pave in Auto

When the Auto Power setting is Off the operator must press the Auto button to return to Auto after a powerdown

Esup2 Reset

Esup2 Reset reconfigures the system to factory settings

Esup2 Reset Settings Range CancelReset

To reset all settings in the Performance Menu and the Technician Menu to factory defaults select Reset and press and hold the Enter button for three (3) seconds

To cancel and return to the previous screen select Cancel

Lock Menu

The Lock-Out Setting allows certain Performance Settings in the Performance Menu to be made inaccessibleto the operator (see ldquoPaver Lock Menu Settingsrdquo on page 14)

If the Auto Power setting is On the machine powers up in Auto any time it was shut down in AutoOnly use Auto Power On in asphalt paver applications

Setting Auto Power to On for a machine other than asphalt pavers is not recommended Seriousinjury to operators or bystanders from unexpected machine movement could result

If you select Reset the Control Box reverts your custom Control Box settings back to their factorydefault values

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1723

levation Gains (Raise and Lower) 14GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Lock-Out Value Range Level 1 - Unlocked Level2 - Moderate Level 3 - Restricted

bull Level 1 ndash all Performance Menu items are accessible to the operator

bull Level 2ndash some items no longer appear in the Performance Menu and are only accessible in theTechnicianrsquos Menu

bull Level 3 ndash additional items no longer appear in the Performance Menu and are only accessible in theTechnicianrsquos Menu

Lock Menu Settings

Table 3 lists the settings that can be locked out (made unavailable)

Elevation Gains (Raise and Lower)

Elevation Gains determines the speed at which your Topcon P-32 System allows the tow point cylinders to adjustto a change in elevation For faster hydraulic response increase the gain value For slower hydraulic responsedecrease the gain value

The objective is to set the gain so the screed reacts to the change in grade quickly but without ldquoovershootingrdquothe new elevation

Gain Elevation Value Range 1-200

Table 3 Paver Lock Menu Settings

Performance Menu Item Level 1 - Unlocked Level 2 - Moderate Level 3 - Restricted

1 Elevation Gains Available Available Locked

2 Slope Gain Available Available Locked

3 Valve Offsets Available Available Locked

4 Elevation Deadband Available Locked Locked

5 Slope Deadband Available Locked Locked

6 Averaging Available Locked Locked

7 Machine Type Available Available Available

8 Display Available Available Available

9 Units Available Available Available

10 System Info Available Available Available

11 Sonic Tracker 3 Available Available Available

12 Slope Resolution Available Available Available

13 Slope Cal Block Available Available Locked

14 Tech Menu Available Available Available

Before setting the Elevation Gain make sure the machines hydraulic flow controls valves are adjustedfor proper cylinder speed according to the manufacturers recommendations

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1823

lope Gain 15GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Slope Gain

This setting determines the speed at which your Topcon P-32 System allows the tow point cylinders to adjustto a change in slope For faster hydraulic response increase the gain value For slower hydraulic responsedecrease the gain value

The objective is to set the gain so the screed reacts to the change in grade quickly but without ldquoovershootingrdquoOn-Grade Slope Gain should not be set at a higher value than the Elevation Gain on the other side of the paver

Gain Elevation Value Range 1-100

Valve Offsets (Raise and Lower)

Valve Offsets is the minimum amount of electrical signals sent to the valve which causes the hydraulic cylinderto move If the valve offset is too small the sensor will not reach On-Grade Likewise if the valve offset valueis too large the sensor will move too much and overshoot On-Grade

Run the Paver until the hydraulic oil is at normal operating temperature before setting the valve offsets Oncethey are set you should not need to readjust the valve offsets unless the Control Box is moved to a new paveror the hydraulic performance changes

Valve Offset Value Range (Raise and Lower) 1 - 999

Elevation Deadband

Elevation Deadband is the area of the Working Window that is On-Grade While the reference is within that areathe paverrsquos valves are idle (closed) Therefore the wider the Elevation Deadband (On-Grade area) the more areference can move up or down without a correction being initiated Once the signal from the reference is outof the deadband your control box drives the hydraulics to place the reference back in the center of thedeadband

Deadband Elevation Value Range 1ndash30 mm

Before setting the Slope Gain ensure the machines hydraulic flow control valves are adjusted forproper cylinder speed according to the manufacturers recommendations

Do not set slope gain at a higher value than the elevation gain on the other side of the paver A highervalue may cause the slope to be over reactive

Set the Valve Offsets before adjusting elevation and slope gains and averaging

The offset value on one side of the paver may differ from the offset value on the other side of thepaver You must verify the offset values before swapping boxes Use the ldquoLeftrdquo and ldquoRightrdquo labelsprovided

Never attempt to use Valve Offsets to compensate for a slower raise or lower speed of your hydraulicvalves as it causes undershooting or overshooting in Slope Mode and can adversely affect the qualityof the mat

Select the amount of Elevation Deadband carefully Too small of an Elevation Deadband causes thetow point cylinder to constantly hunt up and down while the sensor tries to find On-Grade Too largeof an Elevation Deadband does not allow the sensor to send grade corrections to the values causingunwanted variations in mat thickness

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1923

lope Deadband 16GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Slope Deadband

Slope Deadband defines the size of the on-grade area where no valve corrections are made

Deadband Slope Value Range 0025ndash075

The wider the Slope Deadband the greater the slope can vary without initiating a correction

For example if the operator is grading at a 20 slope and the Slope Deadband is set at 10 the system

reads on-grade anywhere from 195 slope to 205 slope The lower the percentage the tighter the SlopeDeadband

Once the slope signal is out of the Slope Deadband System Five drives the hydraulics back within the SlopeDeadband

Working Window Adjustment

Working Window Adjustment adjusts the working window of the sonic tracker (Figure 5)

Working Window Settings 0ndash500 Off

Default 020

The default setting is 020 which gives 020 ft (61 mm) above and below on-grade Setting the value to Offcompletely disables the working window and allows any target to be seen

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 2023

lope Working Window 17GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Figure 5 Sonic Tracker Working Window

Slope Working Window

Slope Working Window adjusts the working window of the Slope Sensor (Figure 6)

Slope Working Window Value Range 01 - 100 Off

Default 20

The default setting is 20 which gives 20 slope above and below ongrade Setting the value to Off completelydisables the working window

Out of Range

Ongrade

Flashing UpDown Arrow

Solid UpDown Arrow

20rsquo

20rsquo

20rsquo

20rsquo

Working

Window

(Adjustable)

ST-3 Sonic Tracker II

When using the Sonic Tracker II to follow a stringline curb or other elevated reference there is adanger of making an unwanted cut if the Trackerrsquos sonic cone moves away from the target This canoccur if the working window is either off or set as high as the distance between the reference and theground Setting the working window to the default value of 20 (020ft) prevents the automatic controlfrom making such a reaction due to a loss of the target

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 2123

martlink (Elevation and Slope) 18GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Figure 6 Slope Working Window

Smartlink (Elevation and Slope)

Smartlink allows the Control Box to send a percentage of the slopeelevation correction on one side of themachine to the Control Box on the other side of the machine preemptively raising or lowering that hydrauliccylinder to keep the machine at the correct grade Smartlink decreases the lag in correction that can occur onone side of the machine as the second Control Box begins moving the valve without having to wait for thesensor on the other side of the machine to detect and correct for a change in elevationslope

Smartlink Value Range 0 - 100

Default 0

Out of Range

Working Window (Adjustable)

Ongrade

20

20

Ongrade

20

20

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 2223

Warranty 19GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

bull bull bull bull bull bull

Warranty

Topcon laser and electronic positioning equipment are guaranteed against defective material and workmanshipunder normal use and application consistent with this Manual The equipment is guaranteed for the period indicatedon the warranty card accompanying the product starting from the date that the product is sold to the originalpurchaser by Topconrsquos Authorized Dealers1

During the warranty period Topcon will at its option repair or replace this product at no additional charge Repairparts and replacement products will be furnished on an exchange basis and will be either reconditioned or new Thislimited warranty does not include service to repair damage to the product resulting from an accident disastermisuses abuse or modification of the product

Warranty service may be obtained from an authorized Topcon warranty service dealer If this product is deliveredby mail purchaser agrees to insure the product or assume the risk of loss or damage in transit to prepay shippingcharges to the warranty service location and to use the original shipping container or equivalent A letter shouldaccompany the package furnishing a description of the problem andor defect

The purchaserrsquos sole remedy shall be replacement as provided above In no event shall Topcon be liable for anydamages or other claim including any claim for lost profits lost savings or other incidental or consequential damagesarising out of the use of or inability to use the product

1 The warranty against defects in a Topcon battery charger or cable is 90 days

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 2323

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 823

Manual Conventions vGC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Manual Conventions

This manual uses the following conventions

Convention Description Example

Bold Menu or drop-down menu item File Exit (Click the File menu and clickExit)

Name of a dialog box or screen From the Connection screen

Button or key commands Click Finish

Mono User supplied text or variable Type guest and click Enter

Italic Reference to another manual or help document Refer to the Topcon Reference Manual

Further information to note about system configuration maintenance or setup

Supplementary information that can have an adverse affect on system operation systemperformance data integrity measurements or personal safety

Notification that an action has the potential to result in system damage loss of data loss ofwarranty or personal injury

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 923

Introduction 1GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

bull bull bull bull bull bull

Introduction

The Technicians Menu contains additional system menu items not available to the operator (end user) in the GC-35 Control Box Performance Menu

These menu items offer the ability to override default settings of the P-32 system to improve system performancein certain situations These menu items are not however meant to be changed by the operator

The following sections describe the features of the GC-35 control box and explain how to access the TechnicianrsquosMenu select a menu item save the new value and exit the Technicianrsquos Menu

Features

Figure 1 GC-35 Control Box

Access to the Technicianrsquos Menu is intended for and should be limited to Topcon qualified dealerand field service technicians Any changes to the factory default settings without a thoroughunderstanding to their effects on the P-32 system may cause adverse consequences to systemaccuracy and operation

Auto Indicator LED

Auto Button

Survey Button

Elevation Indicator

LED (Green)

Slope Indicator

LED (Yellow)

SlopeElevation

Button

Jog UpDown

Buttons

LCD

Light Sensor

Power OnOff

Button

Grade Adjustment

Knob

Grade Adjustment

Arrows

Menu Selection

Buttons

Grade Indicator

LEDs

USB Port

USB Cap

(Removed)

Jaw Mount

Power Connector

Sonic Tracker or Slope Sensor

Connectors

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1023

owering the Control Box OnOff 2GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Powering the Control Box OnOff

Figure 2 Power OnOff

Control ScreenThe Control Screen displays when you power on the control box It is your interface with the components ofthe P-32 system The Control Screen changes depending on how you have configured the Control Box and theP-32 system

The illustration below shows an example of a Control Box set up to display information from a secondary ControlBox set up for Slope Control

Figure 3 Control Screen

Power OnOff

Button

Startup Screen Shutdown Screen

GC-35

Shutting Down

con1047297g 21

Elevation Set

Point Value

Actual Elevation

Sensor Reading

Slope Set Point Value

PositiveNegative

Slope Indicator Icon

Actual Slope

Sensor Reading

MenuSet

Button Function

Display Area

Elevation Icon

Units (ftincm)

ST-3 SurfaceStringline Mode Icon

Display Slope Box

Auto Icon

Slope Icon

Primary Control Box Display Area

Secondary Control Box

Display Area

Cross Communication

On-Grade Icon

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1123

ccessing the Technicianrsquos Menu 3GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Accessing the Technicianrsquos Menu

1 From the Control Screen press the MenuSet button

2 Rotate the Grade Adjustment Knob to scroll through the menu selections displayed on the screen

3 Select Tech Menu and press and hold the Enter button for three (3) seconds to enter the

Technicianrsquos Menu

Figure 4 Accessing the Technicianrsquos Menu

Press MenuSet Button Turn Grade Adjustment Knob Press and Hold

Enter Button for 3 Seconds

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1223

Technicianrsquos Menu 9GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

bull bull bull bull bull bull

Technicianrsquos Menu

This chapter describes the Technicianrsquos Menu items and their default factory settings

Table 1 lists the available menus

Table 1 Technicianrsquos Menu Settings

Menu Item Range Default Factory Setting

Configuration External 0ndash31 Custom External

Averaging 1 ndash 100 50

Valve Type Solenoid ProportionalDanfoss Pulse WidthModulated

Proportional

Valve Drive Sink Source Sink

Dither Amplitude 0ndash15 4

Dither Frequency 0ndash105 42

Frequency 1ndash13Hz

225ndash1950Hz

5Hz

Max Current 067ndash48 Amps 175 Amps

Hour Read only Hours 00

Hours Auto 00

External Auto On Off Invert Off

Auto Power Up (Paver only) On Off On

Esup2 Reset Cancel Reset Cancel

Lock Menu Level 1 - Unlocked

Level 2 - Moderate

Level 3 - Restricted

Level 1 - Unlocked

Elevation Gains Raise 1 ndash 200 Raise 25

Lower 1 ndash 200 Lower 25

Slope Gain 1 ndash 100 25

Valve Offsets Raise 1 ndash 999 Raise 135

Lower 1 ndash 999 Lower 135

Elevation Deadband 1 ndash 30 mm 3 mm

Slope Deadband 0025 ndash 075 0075

Working Window 0ndash500 Off 020 ft

Slope Working Window 01-100 20

Smartlink Slope 0 - 100 Slope 0

Elevation 0 - 100 Elevation 0

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1323

onfiguration 10GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Configuration

This setting selects a valve drive configuration and has up to 32 preprogrammed configurations to select from You may also create a custom configuration

Configuration Value Range External 0-31 Custom

Default External

bull External ndash Upon power up the control box looks for an external configuration resistor between pins Land K of the 11 pin bulkhead connector and defaults to the listed configuration table for valve control

The configuration number displays on the control box LCD when the box is turned onbull Value between 0-31 ndash The control box defaults to the valve control parameters for this number listed inthe configuration chart (see Table 2 on page 10) The configuration number displays on the control boxLCD when the box is turned on

bull Custom ndash Create a custom valve control configuration by setting the Valve Type Current DirectionCurrent Limit Frequency (for PWM modes and Solenoid) Dither Amplitude (except Solenoid mode) andDither Frequency (except Solenoid mode)

Configuration Codes

Table 2 lists available configurations

Table 2 Configuration Codes

ConfigResistor

(ohms)

Drive Type Current Direction Dither Amplitude Dither Freq Freq Hz Current Limit

0 0 Sol Sink None None Adj None

1 77

2 160

3 249

4 341

5 441 Sol Source None None Adj None

6 560 Sol Source None None Adj None

7 670

8 800 Sol Source None None Adj None

9 940 Sol Source None None Adj None10 1100 Sol Sink None None Adj None

11 1260 Sol Source None None Adj

12 1445

14 1890

15 2140 Pro Cur Source 6 42 NA 175A

17 2760 Sol Sink None None Adj None

18 3140 Sol Sink None None Adj None

19 3583 Sol Source None None Adj None

20 4104 Sol Sink None None Adj None

21 4725 Sol Sink None None Adj None

22 5480 Sol

23 6414

26 11310 Sol Source None None Adj None

27 14440

28 19440

29 28670

30 51500 Pro Cur Source 12 42 NA 175A

31 open Pro Cur Sink 6 42 NA 175A

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1423

veraging 11GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Averaging

Averaging changes the amount of dampening or filtering applied to the laser receiver or elevation sensormeasurements Averaging can be thought of as the time period over which a running average of the elevationmeasurement is calculated

Averaging Value Range 1ndash100

Default 50

A lower value averages fewer elevation measurements allowing the system to react more quickly to grade

changes

A larger value averages more elevation measurements making the system less reactive to fluctuations in gradesuch as with laser ldquobeam bouncerdquo on windy days

Valve Type

Valve Type allows you to select the type of valves used on your machine

Valve Type Value Range Solenoid Servo Proportional Danfoss Pulse PWMDefault Proportional

The following sections describe each of these valve types

Proportional Current

Proportional Current provides a current regulated proportional output and is the preferred setting forproportional valves

A percentage of the total current setting is calculated based on the gain setting and given grade correctionProportional Current control applies full machine voltage to the valve coil until the desired current is reachedthen the voltage is turned off When the current drops below the desired value the process is repeated

Proportional Pulse Width Modulated

Proportional Pulse Width Modulated provides a pulse width regulated proportional output

A percentage of the total duty cycle is calculated based on the gain setting and the given grade correction PulseWidth Modulation cycles the output voltage on and off at the desired duty cycle

Solenoid

Solenoid operates the same as PWM mode except set up specifically for the lower frequency solenoid valves

Danfoss

Danfoss provides a proportional voltage output to drive the specific requirements of the Danfoss brand ofproportional valves In this mode switched power (Vsw) and ground connect to the Danfoss valve through thevalve cable and the Raise output pin of the control box controls the reference signal to the valve In a neutral(no grade) correction output the reference signal is held at half of the switched voltage For example if a 12volt system produced 13 volts on the Vsw line 65 volts are held on the reference output for a no correctionsignal

bull For a raise correction signal the control box increases the reference voltage from 65 to a maximum of975 V

Averaging does not affect slope control

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1523

alve Drive 12GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

bull For a lower output signal the control box decreases the reference voltage to a minimum of 325 V

Valve Drive

Valve Drive selects the current direction of the valves on the machine

Valve Drive Value Range Sink Source

Select Sink if the valve has a permanent positive connection and needs a switched negative connection (thecontrol box sinks current)

Select Source if the valve has a permanent ground (negative) connection and needs a switched positiveconnection (the control box sources current)

Dither Amplitude

Dither Amplitude allows you to select the amount of dither to apply to the valve

Dither is a continuous low frequency ldquopulserdquo applied to the valve drive signal for proportional valves to keep thevalversquos spool from sticking

Dither Amplitude Value Range 0ndash15

Dither Amplitude is a percentage of full current for the Proportional Current valve type or duty cycle for thePWM valve type Dither does not apply for Solenoid Danfoss or Servo valve types

Dither Frequency

Dither Frequency adjusts the frequency of the dither in cycles per second

Dither Frequency Value Range 0ndash105 Hz

Frequency

Frequency adjusts the number of pulses sent to control valves in one secondFrequency Value Range 1ndash13 Hz 225ndash1950 Hz

The frequency value is adjustable from 1 to 13 Hz for Solenoid valves On Pulse Width Modulated mode valvesthe range is 225 to 1950 Hz

Max Current

Max Current adjusts the maximum valve drive current that the control box outputs when using ProportionalCurrent valve output mode and the over-current trip level for other valve types

Current Limit Value Range 067ndash48 Amps

If a Danfoss valve sees a reference voltage greater than 75 of Vsw or below 25 of Vsw the valvedefaults to an ldquoerrorrdquo state and the valve is held in the neutral position

Frequency does not apply for Proportional Current and Danfoss valve types

Changing the Frequency has an effect on the Offset Check the Offset after changing theFrequency

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1623

our 13GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Hour

Hour displays the amount of hours the control box has been operating and the amount of hours the control boxhas been operating in Automatic

Hour Settings No settings (read only)

External Auto

External Auto disables or enables an external automanual switch

External Auto Settings OnOffInvert

If On is selected the system requires both an external AM switch and activation of the Control Boxrsquos Autobutton to switch the system in and out of Automatic control Activate the external AM switch by connectingpin E of the 11 PIN bulkhead to ground

If you select Invert connecting pin E to ground takes the system out of Automatic control Automatic controlactivates only when pin E is connected to power such as when connecting to an in-motion switch

Auto Power (Paver Only)

The Auto Power setting allows the system to automatically power up to the last used mode

Auto Power Settings OnOff

When the Auto Power setting is On the system powers up in the last mode seen before power down (Auto orManual) For example the paver is in automatic control is shut down and then powered up once more Thepaver is now ready to pave in Auto

When the Auto Power setting is Off the operator must press the Auto button to return to Auto after a powerdown

Esup2 Reset

Esup2 Reset reconfigures the system to factory settings

Esup2 Reset Settings Range CancelReset

To reset all settings in the Performance Menu and the Technician Menu to factory defaults select Reset and press and hold the Enter button for three (3) seconds

To cancel and return to the previous screen select Cancel

Lock Menu

The Lock-Out Setting allows certain Performance Settings in the Performance Menu to be made inaccessibleto the operator (see ldquoPaver Lock Menu Settingsrdquo on page 14)

If the Auto Power setting is On the machine powers up in Auto any time it was shut down in AutoOnly use Auto Power On in asphalt paver applications

Setting Auto Power to On for a machine other than asphalt pavers is not recommended Seriousinjury to operators or bystanders from unexpected machine movement could result

If you select Reset the Control Box reverts your custom Control Box settings back to their factorydefault values

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1723

levation Gains (Raise and Lower) 14GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Lock-Out Value Range Level 1 - Unlocked Level2 - Moderate Level 3 - Restricted

bull Level 1 ndash all Performance Menu items are accessible to the operator

bull Level 2ndash some items no longer appear in the Performance Menu and are only accessible in theTechnicianrsquos Menu

bull Level 3 ndash additional items no longer appear in the Performance Menu and are only accessible in theTechnicianrsquos Menu

Lock Menu Settings

Table 3 lists the settings that can be locked out (made unavailable)

Elevation Gains (Raise and Lower)

Elevation Gains determines the speed at which your Topcon P-32 System allows the tow point cylinders to adjustto a change in elevation For faster hydraulic response increase the gain value For slower hydraulic responsedecrease the gain value

The objective is to set the gain so the screed reacts to the change in grade quickly but without ldquoovershootingrdquothe new elevation

Gain Elevation Value Range 1-200

Table 3 Paver Lock Menu Settings

Performance Menu Item Level 1 - Unlocked Level 2 - Moderate Level 3 - Restricted

1 Elevation Gains Available Available Locked

2 Slope Gain Available Available Locked

3 Valve Offsets Available Available Locked

4 Elevation Deadband Available Locked Locked

5 Slope Deadband Available Locked Locked

6 Averaging Available Locked Locked

7 Machine Type Available Available Available

8 Display Available Available Available

9 Units Available Available Available

10 System Info Available Available Available

11 Sonic Tracker 3 Available Available Available

12 Slope Resolution Available Available Available

13 Slope Cal Block Available Available Locked

14 Tech Menu Available Available Available

Before setting the Elevation Gain make sure the machines hydraulic flow controls valves are adjustedfor proper cylinder speed according to the manufacturers recommendations

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1823

lope Gain 15GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Slope Gain

This setting determines the speed at which your Topcon P-32 System allows the tow point cylinders to adjustto a change in slope For faster hydraulic response increase the gain value For slower hydraulic responsedecrease the gain value

The objective is to set the gain so the screed reacts to the change in grade quickly but without ldquoovershootingrdquoOn-Grade Slope Gain should not be set at a higher value than the Elevation Gain on the other side of the paver

Gain Elevation Value Range 1-100

Valve Offsets (Raise and Lower)

Valve Offsets is the minimum amount of electrical signals sent to the valve which causes the hydraulic cylinderto move If the valve offset is too small the sensor will not reach On-Grade Likewise if the valve offset valueis too large the sensor will move too much and overshoot On-Grade

Run the Paver until the hydraulic oil is at normal operating temperature before setting the valve offsets Oncethey are set you should not need to readjust the valve offsets unless the Control Box is moved to a new paveror the hydraulic performance changes

Valve Offset Value Range (Raise and Lower) 1 - 999

Elevation Deadband

Elevation Deadband is the area of the Working Window that is On-Grade While the reference is within that areathe paverrsquos valves are idle (closed) Therefore the wider the Elevation Deadband (On-Grade area) the more areference can move up or down without a correction being initiated Once the signal from the reference is outof the deadband your control box drives the hydraulics to place the reference back in the center of thedeadband

Deadband Elevation Value Range 1ndash30 mm

Before setting the Slope Gain ensure the machines hydraulic flow control valves are adjusted forproper cylinder speed according to the manufacturers recommendations

Do not set slope gain at a higher value than the elevation gain on the other side of the paver A highervalue may cause the slope to be over reactive

Set the Valve Offsets before adjusting elevation and slope gains and averaging

The offset value on one side of the paver may differ from the offset value on the other side of thepaver You must verify the offset values before swapping boxes Use the ldquoLeftrdquo and ldquoRightrdquo labelsprovided

Never attempt to use Valve Offsets to compensate for a slower raise or lower speed of your hydraulicvalves as it causes undershooting or overshooting in Slope Mode and can adversely affect the qualityof the mat

Select the amount of Elevation Deadband carefully Too small of an Elevation Deadband causes thetow point cylinder to constantly hunt up and down while the sensor tries to find On-Grade Too largeof an Elevation Deadband does not allow the sensor to send grade corrections to the values causingunwanted variations in mat thickness

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1923

lope Deadband 16GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Slope Deadband

Slope Deadband defines the size of the on-grade area where no valve corrections are made

Deadband Slope Value Range 0025ndash075

The wider the Slope Deadband the greater the slope can vary without initiating a correction

For example if the operator is grading at a 20 slope and the Slope Deadband is set at 10 the system

reads on-grade anywhere from 195 slope to 205 slope The lower the percentage the tighter the SlopeDeadband

Once the slope signal is out of the Slope Deadband System Five drives the hydraulics back within the SlopeDeadband

Working Window Adjustment

Working Window Adjustment adjusts the working window of the sonic tracker (Figure 5)

Working Window Settings 0ndash500 Off

Default 020

The default setting is 020 which gives 020 ft (61 mm) above and below on-grade Setting the value to Offcompletely disables the working window and allows any target to be seen

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 2023

lope Working Window 17GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Figure 5 Sonic Tracker Working Window

Slope Working Window

Slope Working Window adjusts the working window of the Slope Sensor (Figure 6)

Slope Working Window Value Range 01 - 100 Off

Default 20

The default setting is 20 which gives 20 slope above and below ongrade Setting the value to Off completelydisables the working window

Out of Range

Ongrade

Flashing UpDown Arrow

Solid UpDown Arrow

20rsquo

20rsquo

20rsquo

20rsquo

Working

Window

(Adjustable)

ST-3 Sonic Tracker II

When using the Sonic Tracker II to follow a stringline curb or other elevated reference there is adanger of making an unwanted cut if the Trackerrsquos sonic cone moves away from the target This canoccur if the working window is either off or set as high as the distance between the reference and theground Setting the working window to the default value of 20 (020ft) prevents the automatic controlfrom making such a reaction due to a loss of the target

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 2123

martlink (Elevation and Slope) 18GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Figure 6 Slope Working Window

Smartlink (Elevation and Slope)

Smartlink allows the Control Box to send a percentage of the slopeelevation correction on one side of themachine to the Control Box on the other side of the machine preemptively raising or lowering that hydrauliccylinder to keep the machine at the correct grade Smartlink decreases the lag in correction that can occur onone side of the machine as the second Control Box begins moving the valve without having to wait for thesensor on the other side of the machine to detect and correct for a change in elevationslope

Smartlink Value Range 0 - 100

Default 0

Out of Range

Working Window (Adjustable)

Ongrade

20

20

Ongrade

20

20

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 2223

Warranty 19GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

bull bull bull bull bull bull

Warranty

Topcon laser and electronic positioning equipment are guaranteed against defective material and workmanshipunder normal use and application consistent with this Manual The equipment is guaranteed for the period indicatedon the warranty card accompanying the product starting from the date that the product is sold to the originalpurchaser by Topconrsquos Authorized Dealers1

During the warranty period Topcon will at its option repair or replace this product at no additional charge Repairparts and replacement products will be furnished on an exchange basis and will be either reconditioned or new Thislimited warranty does not include service to repair damage to the product resulting from an accident disastermisuses abuse or modification of the product

Warranty service may be obtained from an authorized Topcon warranty service dealer If this product is deliveredby mail purchaser agrees to insure the product or assume the risk of loss or damage in transit to prepay shippingcharges to the warranty service location and to use the original shipping container or equivalent A letter shouldaccompany the package furnishing a description of the problem andor defect

The purchaserrsquos sole remedy shall be replacement as provided above In no event shall Topcon be liable for anydamages or other claim including any claim for lost profits lost savings or other incidental or consequential damagesarising out of the use of or inability to use the product

1 The warranty against defects in a Topcon battery charger or cable is 90 days

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 2323

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 923

Introduction 1GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

bull bull bull bull bull bull

Introduction

The Technicians Menu contains additional system menu items not available to the operator (end user) in the GC-35 Control Box Performance Menu

These menu items offer the ability to override default settings of the P-32 system to improve system performancein certain situations These menu items are not however meant to be changed by the operator

The following sections describe the features of the GC-35 control box and explain how to access the TechnicianrsquosMenu select a menu item save the new value and exit the Technicianrsquos Menu

Features

Figure 1 GC-35 Control Box

Access to the Technicianrsquos Menu is intended for and should be limited to Topcon qualified dealerand field service technicians Any changes to the factory default settings without a thoroughunderstanding to their effects on the P-32 system may cause adverse consequences to systemaccuracy and operation

Auto Indicator LED

Auto Button

Survey Button

Elevation Indicator

LED (Green)

Slope Indicator

LED (Yellow)

SlopeElevation

Button

Jog UpDown

Buttons

LCD

Light Sensor

Power OnOff

Button

Grade Adjustment

Knob

Grade Adjustment

Arrows

Menu Selection

Buttons

Grade Indicator

LEDs

USB Port

USB Cap

(Removed)

Jaw Mount

Power Connector

Sonic Tracker or Slope Sensor

Connectors

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1023

owering the Control Box OnOff 2GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Powering the Control Box OnOff

Figure 2 Power OnOff

Control ScreenThe Control Screen displays when you power on the control box It is your interface with the components ofthe P-32 system The Control Screen changes depending on how you have configured the Control Box and theP-32 system

The illustration below shows an example of a Control Box set up to display information from a secondary ControlBox set up for Slope Control

Figure 3 Control Screen

Power OnOff

Button

Startup Screen Shutdown Screen

GC-35

Shutting Down

con1047297g 21

Elevation Set

Point Value

Actual Elevation

Sensor Reading

Slope Set Point Value

PositiveNegative

Slope Indicator Icon

Actual Slope

Sensor Reading

MenuSet

Button Function

Display Area

Elevation Icon

Units (ftincm)

ST-3 SurfaceStringline Mode Icon

Display Slope Box

Auto Icon

Slope Icon

Primary Control Box Display Area

Secondary Control Box

Display Area

Cross Communication

On-Grade Icon

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1123

ccessing the Technicianrsquos Menu 3GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Accessing the Technicianrsquos Menu

1 From the Control Screen press the MenuSet button

2 Rotate the Grade Adjustment Knob to scroll through the menu selections displayed on the screen

3 Select Tech Menu and press and hold the Enter button for three (3) seconds to enter the

Technicianrsquos Menu

Figure 4 Accessing the Technicianrsquos Menu

Press MenuSet Button Turn Grade Adjustment Knob Press and Hold

Enter Button for 3 Seconds

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1223

Technicianrsquos Menu 9GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

bull bull bull bull bull bull

Technicianrsquos Menu

This chapter describes the Technicianrsquos Menu items and their default factory settings

Table 1 lists the available menus

Table 1 Technicianrsquos Menu Settings

Menu Item Range Default Factory Setting

Configuration External 0ndash31 Custom External

Averaging 1 ndash 100 50

Valve Type Solenoid ProportionalDanfoss Pulse WidthModulated

Proportional

Valve Drive Sink Source Sink

Dither Amplitude 0ndash15 4

Dither Frequency 0ndash105 42

Frequency 1ndash13Hz

225ndash1950Hz

5Hz

Max Current 067ndash48 Amps 175 Amps

Hour Read only Hours 00

Hours Auto 00

External Auto On Off Invert Off

Auto Power Up (Paver only) On Off On

Esup2 Reset Cancel Reset Cancel

Lock Menu Level 1 - Unlocked

Level 2 - Moderate

Level 3 - Restricted

Level 1 - Unlocked

Elevation Gains Raise 1 ndash 200 Raise 25

Lower 1 ndash 200 Lower 25

Slope Gain 1 ndash 100 25

Valve Offsets Raise 1 ndash 999 Raise 135

Lower 1 ndash 999 Lower 135

Elevation Deadband 1 ndash 30 mm 3 mm

Slope Deadband 0025 ndash 075 0075

Working Window 0ndash500 Off 020 ft

Slope Working Window 01-100 20

Smartlink Slope 0 - 100 Slope 0

Elevation 0 - 100 Elevation 0

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1323

onfiguration 10GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Configuration

This setting selects a valve drive configuration and has up to 32 preprogrammed configurations to select from You may also create a custom configuration

Configuration Value Range External 0-31 Custom

Default External

bull External ndash Upon power up the control box looks for an external configuration resistor between pins Land K of the 11 pin bulkhead connector and defaults to the listed configuration table for valve control

The configuration number displays on the control box LCD when the box is turned onbull Value between 0-31 ndash The control box defaults to the valve control parameters for this number listed inthe configuration chart (see Table 2 on page 10) The configuration number displays on the control boxLCD when the box is turned on

bull Custom ndash Create a custom valve control configuration by setting the Valve Type Current DirectionCurrent Limit Frequency (for PWM modes and Solenoid) Dither Amplitude (except Solenoid mode) andDither Frequency (except Solenoid mode)

Configuration Codes

Table 2 lists available configurations

Table 2 Configuration Codes

ConfigResistor

(ohms)

Drive Type Current Direction Dither Amplitude Dither Freq Freq Hz Current Limit

0 0 Sol Sink None None Adj None

1 77

2 160

3 249

4 341

5 441 Sol Source None None Adj None

6 560 Sol Source None None Adj None

7 670

8 800 Sol Source None None Adj None

9 940 Sol Source None None Adj None10 1100 Sol Sink None None Adj None

11 1260 Sol Source None None Adj

12 1445

14 1890

15 2140 Pro Cur Source 6 42 NA 175A

17 2760 Sol Sink None None Adj None

18 3140 Sol Sink None None Adj None

19 3583 Sol Source None None Adj None

20 4104 Sol Sink None None Adj None

21 4725 Sol Sink None None Adj None

22 5480 Sol

23 6414

26 11310 Sol Source None None Adj None

27 14440

28 19440

29 28670

30 51500 Pro Cur Source 12 42 NA 175A

31 open Pro Cur Sink 6 42 NA 175A

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1423

veraging 11GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Averaging

Averaging changes the amount of dampening or filtering applied to the laser receiver or elevation sensormeasurements Averaging can be thought of as the time period over which a running average of the elevationmeasurement is calculated

Averaging Value Range 1ndash100

Default 50

A lower value averages fewer elevation measurements allowing the system to react more quickly to grade

changes

A larger value averages more elevation measurements making the system less reactive to fluctuations in gradesuch as with laser ldquobeam bouncerdquo on windy days

Valve Type

Valve Type allows you to select the type of valves used on your machine

Valve Type Value Range Solenoid Servo Proportional Danfoss Pulse PWMDefault Proportional

The following sections describe each of these valve types

Proportional Current

Proportional Current provides a current regulated proportional output and is the preferred setting forproportional valves

A percentage of the total current setting is calculated based on the gain setting and given grade correctionProportional Current control applies full machine voltage to the valve coil until the desired current is reachedthen the voltage is turned off When the current drops below the desired value the process is repeated

Proportional Pulse Width Modulated

Proportional Pulse Width Modulated provides a pulse width regulated proportional output

A percentage of the total duty cycle is calculated based on the gain setting and the given grade correction PulseWidth Modulation cycles the output voltage on and off at the desired duty cycle

Solenoid

Solenoid operates the same as PWM mode except set up specifically for the lower frequency solenoid valves

Danfoss

Danfoss provides a proportional voltage output to drive the specific requirements of the Danfoss brand ofproportional valves In this mode switched power (Vsw) and ground connect to the Danfoss valve through thevalve cable and the Raise output pin of the control box controls the reference signal to the valve In a neutral(no grade) correction output the reference signal is held at half of the switched voltage For example if a 12volt system produced 13 volts on the Vsw line 65 volts are held on the reference output for a no correctionsignal

bull For a raise correction signal the control box increases the reference voltage from 65 to a maximum of975 V

Averaging does not affect slope control

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1523

alve Drive 12GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

bull For a lower output signal the control box decreases the reference voltage to a minimum of 325 V

Valve Drive

Valve Drive selects the current direction of the valves on the machine

Valve Drive Value Range Sink Source

Select Sink if the valve has a permanent positive connection and needs a switched negative connection (thecontrol box sinks current)

Select Source if the valve has a permanent ground (negative) connection and needs a switched positiveconnection (the control box sources current)

Dither Amplitude

Dither Amplitude allows you to select the amount of dither to apply to the valve

Dither is a continuous low frequency ldquopulserdquo applied to the valve drive signal for proportional valves to keep thevalversquos spool from sticking

Dither Amplitude Value Range 0ndash15

Dither Amplitude is a percentage of full current for the Proportional Current valve type or duty cycle for thePWM valve type Dither does not apply for Solenoid Danfoss or Servo valve types

Dither Frequency

Dither Frequency adjusts the frequency of the dither in cycles per second

Dither Frequency Value Range 0ndash105 Hz

Frequency

Frequency adjusts the number of pulses sent to control valves in one secondFrequency Value Range 1ndash13 Hz 225ndash1950 Hz

The frequency value is adjustable from 1 to 13 Hz for Solenoid valves On Pulse Width Modulated mode valvesthe range is 225 to 1950 Hz

Max Current

Max Current adjusts the maximum valve drive current that the control box outputs when using ProportionalCurrent valve output mode and the over-current trip level for other valve types

Current Limit Value Range 067ndash48 Amps

If a Danfoss valve sees a reference voltage greater than 75 of Vsw or below 25 of Vsw the valvedefaults to an ldquoerrorrdquo state and the valve is held in the neutral position

Frequency does not apply for Proportional Current and Danfoss valve types

Changing the Frequency has an effect on the Offset Check the Offset after changing theFrequency

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1623

our 13GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Hour

Hour displays the amount of hours the control box has been operating and the amount of hours the control boxhas been operating in Automatic

Hour Settings No settings (read only)

External Auto

External Auto disables or enables an external automanual switch

External Auto Settings OnOffInvert

If On is selected the system requires both an external AM switch and activation of the Control Boxrsquos Autobutton to switch the system in and out of Automatic control Activate the external AM switch by connectingpin E of the 11 PIN bulkhead to ground

If you select Invert connecting pin E to ground takes the system out of Automatic control Automatic controlactivates only when pin E is connected to power such as when connecting to an in-motion switch

Auto Power (Paver Only)

The Auto Power setting allows the system to automatically power up to the last used mode

Auto Power Settings OnOff

When the Auto Power setting is On the system powers up in the last mode seen before power down (Auto orManual) For example the paver is in automatic control is shut down and then powered up once more Thepaver is now ready to pave in Auto

When the Auto Power setting is Off the operator must press the Auto button to return to Auto after a powerdown

Esup2 Reset

Esup2 Reset reconfigures the system to factory settings

Esup2 Reset Settings Range CancelReset

To reset all settings in the Performance Menu and the Technician Menu to factory defaults select Reset and press and hold the Enter button for three (3) seconds

To cancel and return to the previous screen select Cancel

Lock Menu

The Lock-Out Setting allows certain Performance Settings in the Performance Menu to be made inaccessibleto the operator (see ldquoPaver Lock Menu Settingsrdquo on page 14)

If the Auto Power setting is On the machine powers up in Auto any time it was shut down in AutoOnly use Auto Power On in asphalt paver applications

Setting Auto Power to On for a machine other than asphalt pavers is not recommended Seriousinjury to operators or bystanders from unexpected machine movement could result

If you select Reset the Control Box reverts your custom Control Box settings back to their factorydefault values

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1723

levation Gains (Raise and Lower) 14GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Lock-Out Value Range Level 1 - Unlocked Level2 - Moderate Level 3 - Restricted

bull Level 1 ndash all Performance Menu items are accessible to the operator

bull Level 2ndash some items no longer appear in the Performance Menu and are only accessible in theTechnicianrsquos Menu

bull Level 3 ndash additional items no longer appear in the Performance Menu and are only accessible in theTechnicianrsquos Menu

Lock Menu Settings

Table 3 lists the settings that can be locked out (made unavailable)

Elevation Gains (Raise and Lower)

Elevation Gains determines the speed at which your Topcon P-32 System allows the tow point cylinders to adjustto a change in elevation For faster hydraulic response increase the gain value For slower hydraulic responsedecrease the gain value

The objective is to set the gain so the screed reacts to the change in grade quickly but without ldquoovershootingrdquothe new elevation

Gain Elevation Value Range 1-200

Table 3 Paver Lock Menu Settings

Performance Menu Item Level 1 - Unlocked Level 2 - Moderate Level 3 - Restricted

1 Elevation Gains Available Available Locked

2 Slope Gain Available Available Locked

3 Valve Offsets Available Available Locked

4 Elevation Deadband Available Locked Locked

5 Slope Deadband Available Locked Locked

6 Averaging Available Locked Locked

7 Machine Type Available Available Available

8 Display Available Available Available

9 Units Available Available Available

10 System Info Available Available Available

11 Sonic Tracker 3 Available Available Available

12 Slope Resolution Available Available Available

13 Slope Cal Block Available Available Locked

14 Tech Menu Available Available Available

Before setting the Elevation Gain make sure the machines hydraulic flow controls valves are adjustedfor proper cylinder speed according to the manufacturers recommendations

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1823

lope Gain 15GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Slope Gain

This setting determines the speed at which your Topcon P-32 System allows the tow point cylinders to adjustto a change in slope For faster hydraulic response increase the gain value For slower hydraulic responsedecrease the gain value

The objective is to set the gain so the screed reacts to the change in grade quickly but without ldquoovershootingrdquoOn-Grade Slope Gain should not be set at a higher value than the Elevation Gain on the other side of the paver

Gain Elevation Value Range 1-100

Valve Offsets (Raise and Lower)

Valve Offsets is the minimum amount of electrical signals sent to the valve which causes the hydraulic cylinderto move If the valve offset is too small the sensor will not reach On-Grade Likewise if the valve offset valueis too large the sensor will move too much and overshoot On-Grade

Run the Paver until the hydraulic oil is at normal operating temperature before setting the valve offsets Oncethey are set you should not need to readjust the valve offsets unless the Control Box is moved to a new paveror the hydraulic performance changes

Valve Offset Value Range (Raise and Lower) 1 - 999

Elevation Deadband

Elevation Deadband is the area of the Working Window that is On-Grade While the reference is within that areathe paverrsquos valves are idle (closed) Therefore the wider the Elevation Deadband (On-Grade area) the more areference can move up or down without a correction being initiated Once the signal from the reference is outof the deadband your control box drives the hydraulics to place the reference back in the center of thedeadband

Deadband Elevation Value Range 1ndash30 mm

Before setting the Slope Gain ensure the machines hydraulic flow control valves are adjusted forproper cylinder speed according to the manufacturers recommendations

Do not set slope gain at a higher value than the elevation gain on the other side of the paver A highervalue may cause the slope to be over reactive

Set the Valve Offsets before adjusting elevation and slope gains and averaging

The offset value on one side of the paver may differ from the offset value on the other side of thepaver You must verify the offset values before swapping boxes Use the ldquoLeftrdquo and ldquoRightrdquo labelsprovided

Never attempt to use Valve Offsets to compensate for a slower raise or lower speed of your hydraulicvalves as it causes undershooting or overshooting in Slope Mode and can adversely affect the qualityof the mat

Select the amount of Elevation Deadband carefully Too small of an Elevation Deadband causes thetow point cylinder to constantly hunt up and down while the sensor tries to find On-Grade Too largeof an Elevation Deadband does not allow the sensor to send grade corrections to the values causingunwanted variations in mat thickness

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1923

lope Deadband 16GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Slope Deadband

Slope Deadband defines the size of the on-grade area where no valve corrections are made

Deadband Slope Value Range 0025ndash075

The wider the Slope Deadband the greater the slope can vary without initiating a correction

For example if the operator is grading at a 20 slope and the Slope Deadband is set at 10 the system

reads on-grade anywhere from 195 slope to 205 slope The lower the percentage the tighter the SlopeDeadband

Once the slope signal is out of the Slope Deadband System Five drives the hydraulics back within the SlopeDeadband

Working Window Adjustment

Working Window Adjustment adjusts the working window of the sonic tracker (Figure 5)

Working Window Settings 0ndash500 Off

Default 020

The default setting is 020 which gives 020 ft (61 mm) above and below on-grade Setting the value to Offcompletely disables the working window and allows any target to be seen

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 2023

lope Working Window 17GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Figure 5 Sonic Tracker Working Window

Slope Working Window

Slope Working Window adjusts the working window of the Slope Sensor (Figure 6)

Slope Working Window Value Range 01 - 100 Off

Default 20

The default setting is 20 which gives 20 slope above and below ongrade Setting the value to Off completelydisables the working window

Out of Range

Ongrade

Flashing UpDown Arrow

Solid UpDown Arrow

20rsquo

20rsquo

20rsquo

20rsquo

Working

Window

(Adjustable)

ST-3 Sonic Tracker II

When using the Sonic Tracker II to follow a stringline curb or other elevated reference there is adanger of making an unwanted cut if the Trackerrsquos sonic cone moves away from the target This canoccur if the working window is either off or set as high as the distance between the reference and theground Setting the working window to the default value of 20 (020ft) prevents the automatic controlfrom making such a reaction due to a loss of the target

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 2123

martlink (Elevation and Slope) 18GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Figure 6 Slope Working Window

Smartlink (Elevation and Slope)

Smartlink allows the Control Box to send a percentage of the slopeelevation correction on one side of themachine to the Control Box on the other side of the machine preemptively raising or lowering that hydrauliccylinder to keep the machine at the correct grade Smartlink decreases the lag in correction that can occur onone side of the machine as the second Control Box begins moving the valve without having to wait for thesensor on the other side of the machine to detect and correct for a change in elevationslope

Smartlink Value Range 0 - 100

Default 0

Out of Range

Working Window (Adjustable)

Ongrade

20

20

Ongrade

20

20

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 2223

Warranty 19GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

bull bull bull bull bull bull

Warranty

Topcon laser and electronic positioning equipment are guaranteed against defective material and workmanshipunder normal use and application consistent with this Manual The equipment is guaranteed for the period indicatedon the warranty card accompanying the product starting from the date that the product is sold to the originalpurchaser by Topconrsquos Authorized Dealers1

During the warranty period Topcon will at its option repair or replace this product at no additional charge Repairparts and replacement products will be furnished on an exchange basis and will be either reconditioned or new Thislimited warranty does not include service to repair damage to the product resulting from an accident disastermisuses abuse or modification of the product

Warranty service may be obtained from an authorized Topcon warranty service dealer If this product is deliveredby mail purchaser agrees to insure the product or assume the risk of loss or damage in transit to prepay shippingcharges to the warranty service location and to use the original shipping container or equivalent A letter shouldaccompany the package furnishing a description of the problem andor defect

The purchaserrsquos sole remedy shall be replacement as provided above In no event shall Topcon be liable for anydamages or other claim including any claim for lost profits lost savings or other incidental or consequential damagesarising out of the use of or inability to use the product

1 The warranty against defects in a Topcon battery charger or cable is 90 days

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 2323

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1023

owering the Control Box OnOff 2GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Powering the Control Box OnOff

Figure 2 Power OnOff

Control ScreenThe Control Screen displays when you power on the control box It is your interface with the components ofthe P-32 system The Control Screen changes depending on how you have configured the Control Box and theP-32 system

The illustration below shows an example of a Control Box set up to display information from a secondary ControlBox set up for Slope Control

Figure 3 Control Screen

Power OnOff

Button

Startup Screen Shutdown Screen

GC-35

Shutting Down

con1047297g 21

Elevation Set

Point Value

Actual Elevation

Sensor Reading

Slope Set Point Value

PositiveNegative

Slope Indicator Icon

Actual Slope

Sensor Reading

MenuSet

Button Function

Display Area

Elevation Icon

Units (ftincm)

ST-3 SurfaceStringline Mode Icon

Display Slope Box

Auto Icon

Slope Icon

Primary Control Box Display Area

Secondary Control Box

Display Area

Cross Communication

On-Grade Icon

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1123

ccessing the Technicianrsquos Menu 3GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Accessing the Technicianrsquos Menu

1 From the Control Screen press the MenuSet button

2 Rotate the Grade Adjustment Knob to scroll through the menu selections displayed on the screen

3 Select Tech Menu and press and hold the Enter button for three (3) seconds to enter the

Technicianrsquos Menu

Figure 4 Accessing the Technicianrsquos Menu

Press MenuSet Button Turn Grade Adjustment Knob Press and Hold

Enter Button for 3 Seconds

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1223

Technicianrsquos Menu 9GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

bull bull bull bull bull bull

Technicianrsquos Menu

This chapter describes the Technicianrsquos Menu items and their default factory settings

Table 1 lists the available menus

Table 1 Technicianrsquos Menu Settings

Menu Item Range Default Factory Setting

Configuration External 0ndash31 Custom External

Averaging 1 ndash 100 50

Valve Type Solenoid ProportionalDanfoss Pulse WidthModulated

Proportional

Valve Drive Sink Source Sink

Dither Amplitude 0ndash15 4

Dither Frequency 0ndash105 42

Frequency 1ndash13Hz

225ndash1950Hz

5Hz

Max Current 067ndash48 Amps 175 Amps

Hour Read only Hours 00

Hours Auto 00

External Auto On Off Invert Off

Auto Power Up (Paver only) On Off On

Esup2 Reset Cancel Reset Cancel

Lock Menu Level 1 - Unlocked

Level 2 - Moderate

Level 3 - Restricted

Level 1 - Unlocked

Elevation Gains Raise 1 ndash 200 Raise 25

Lower 1 ndash 200 Lower 25

Slope Gain 1 ndash 100 25

Valve Offsets Raise 1 ndash 999 Raise 135

Lower 1 ndash 999 Lower 135

Elevation Deadband 1 ndash 30 mm 3 mm

Slope Deadband 0025 ndash 075 0075

Working Window 0ndash500 Off 020 ft

Slope Working Window 01-100 20

Smartlink Slope 0 - 100 Slope 0

Elevation 0 - 100 Elevation 0

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1323

onfiguration 10GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Configuration

This setting selects a valve drive configuration and has up to 32 preprogrammed configurations to select from You may also create a custom configuration

Configuration Value Range External 0-31 Custom

Default External

bull External ndash Upon power up the control box looks for an external configuration resistor between pins Land K of the 11 pin bulkhead connector and defaults to the listed configuration table for valve control

The configuration number displays on the control box LCD when the box is turned onbull Value between 0-31 ndash The control box defaults to the valve control parameters for this number listed inthe configuration chart (see Table 2 on page 10) The configuration number displays on the control boxLCD when the box is turned on

bull Custom ndash Create a custom valve control configuration by setting the Valve Type Current DirectionCurrent Limit Frequency (for PWM modes and Solenoid) Dither Amplitude (except Solenoid mode) andDither Frequency (except Solenoid mode)

Configuration Codes

Table 2 lists available configurations

Table 2 Configuration Codes

ConfigResistor

(ohms)

Drive Type Current Direction Dither Amplitude Dither Freq Freq Hz Current Limit

0 0 Sol Sink None None Adj None

1 77

2 160

3 249

4 341

5 441 Sol Source None None Adj None

6 560 Sol Source None None Adj None

7 670

8 800 Sol Source None None Adj None

9 940 Sol Source None None Adj None10 1100 Sol Sink None None Adj None

11 1260 Sol Source None None Adj

12 1445

14 1890

15 2140 Pro Cur Source 6 42 NA 175A

17 2760 Sol Sink None None Adj None

18 3140 Sol Sink None None Adj None

19 3583 Sol Source None None Adj None

20 4104 Sol Sink None None Adj None

21 4725 Sol Sink None None Adj None

22 5480 Sol

23 6414

26 11310 Sol Source None None Adj None

27 14440

28 19440

29 28670

30 51500 Pro Cur Source 12 42 NA 175A

31 open Pro Cur Sink 6 42 NA 175A

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1423

veraging 11GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Averaging

Averaging changes the amount of dampening or filtering applied to the laser receiver or elevation sensormeasurements Averaging can be thought of as the time period over which a running average of the elevationmeasurement is calculated

Averaging Value Range 1ndash100

Default 50

A lower value averages fewer elevation measurements allowing the system to react more quickly to grade

changes

A larger value averages more elevation measurements making the system less reactive to fluctuations in gradesuch as with laser ldquobeam bouncerdquo on windy days

Valve Type

Valve Type allows you to select the type of valves used on your machine

Valve Type Value Range Solenoid Servo Proportional Danfoss Pulse PWMDefault Proportional

The following sections describe each of these valve types

Proportional Current

Proportional Current provides a current regulated proportional output and is the preferred setting forproportional valves

A percentage of the total current setting is calculated based on the gain setting and given grade correctionProportional Current control applies full machine voltage to the valve coil until the desired current is reachedthen the voltage is turned off When the current drops below the desired value the process is repeated

Proportional Pulse Width Modulated

Proportional Pulse Width Modulated provides a pulse width regulated proportional output

A percentage of the total duty cycle is calculated based on the gain setting and the given grade correction PulseWidth Modulation cycles the output voltage on and off at the desired duty cycle

Solenoid

Solenoid operates the same as PWM mode except set up specifically for the lower frequency solenoid valves

Danfoss

Danfoss provides a proportional voltage output to drive the specific requirements of the Danfoss brand ofproportional valves In this mode switched power (Vsw) and ground connect to the Danfoss valve through thevalve cable and the Raise output pin of the control box controls the reference signal to the valve In a neutral(no grade) correction output the reference signal is held at half of the switched voltage For example if a 12volt system produced 13 volts on the Vsw line 65 volts are held on the reference output for a no correctionsignal

bull For a raise correction signal the control box increases the reference voltage from 65 to a maximum of975 V

Averaging does not affect slope control

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1523

alve Drive 12GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

bull For a lower output signal the control box decreases the reference voltage to a minimum of 325 V

Valve Drive

Valve Drive selects the current direction of the valves on the machine

Valve Drive Value Range Sink Source

Select Sink if the valve has a permanent positive connection and needs a switched negative connection (thecontrol box sinks current)

Select Source if the valve has a permanent ground (negative) connection and needs a switched positiveconnection (the control box sources current)

Dither Amplitude

Dither Amplitude allows you to select the amount of dither to apply to the valve

Dither is a continuous low frequency ldquopulserdquo applied to the valve drive signal for proportional valves to keep thevalversquos spool from sticking

Dither Amplitude Value Range 0ndash15

Dither Amplitude is a percentage of full current for the Proportional Current valve type or duty cycle for thePWM valve type Dither does not apply for Solenoid Danfoss or Servo valve types

Dither Frequency

Dither Frequency adjusts the frequency of the dither in cycles per second

Dither Frequency Value Range 0ndash105 Hz

Frequency

Frequency adjusts the number of pulses sent to control valves in one secondFrequency Value Range 1ndash13 Hz 225ndash1950 Hz

The frequency value is adjustable from 1 to 13 Hz for Solenoid valves On Pulse Width Modulated mode valvesthe range is 225 to 1950 Hz

Max Current

Max Current adjusts the maximum valve drive current that the control box outputs when using ProportionalCurrent valve output mode and the over-current trip level for other valve types

Current Limit Value Range 067ndash48 Amps

If a Danfoss valve sees a reference voltage greater than 75 of Vsw or below 25 of Vsw the valvedefaults to an ldquoerrorrdquo state and the valve is held in the neutral position

Frequency does not apply for Proportional Current and Danfoss valve types

Changing the Frequency has an effect on the Offset Check the Offset after changing theFrequency

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1623

our 13GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Hour

Hour displays the amount of hours the control box has been operating and the amount of hours the control boxhas been operating in Automatic

Hour Settings No settings (read only)

External Auto

External Auto disables or enables an external automanual switch

External Auto Settings OnOffInvert

If On is selected the system requires both an external AM switch and activation of the Control Boxrsquos Autobutton to switch the system in and out of Automatic control Activate the external AM switch by connectingpin E of the 11 PIN bulkhead to ground

If you select Invert connecting pin E to ground takes the system out of Automatic control Automatic controlactivates only when pin E is connected to power such as when connecting to an in-motion switch

Auto Power (Paver Only)

The Auto Power setting allows the system to automatically power up to the last used mode

Auto Power Settings OnOff

When the Auto Power setting is On the system powers up in the last mode seen before power down (Auto orManual) For example the paver is in automatic control is shut down and then powered up once more Thepaver is now ready to pave in Auto

When the Auto Power setting is Off the operator must press the Auto button to return to Auto after a powerdown

Esup2 Reset

Esup2 Reset reconfigures the system to factory settings

Esup2 Reset Settings Range CancelReset

To reset all settings in the Performance Menu and the Technician Menu to factory defaults select Reset and press and hold the Enter button for three (3) seconds

To cancel and return to the previous screen select Cancel

Lock Menu

The Lock-Out Setting allows certain Performance Settings in the Performance Menu to be made inaccessibleto the operator (see ldquoPaver Lock Menu Settingsrdquo on page 14)

If the Auto Power setting is On the machine powers up in Auto any time it was shut down in AutoOnly use Auto Power On in asphalt paver applications

Setting Auto Power to On for a machine other than asphalt pavers is not recommended Seriousinjury to operators or bystanders from unexpected machine movement could result

If you select Reset the Control Box reverts your custom Control Box settings back to their factorydefault values

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1723

levation Gains (Raise and Lower) 14GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Lock-Out Value Range Level 1 - Unlocked Level2 - Moderate Level 3 - Restricted

bull Level 1 ndash all Performance Menu items are accessible to the operator

bull Level 2ndash some items no longer appear in the Performance Menu and are only accessible in theTechnicianrsquos Menu

bull Level 3 ndash additional items no longer appear in the Performance Menu and are only accessible in theTechnicianrsquos Menu

Lock Menu Settings

Table 3 lists the settings that can be locked out (made unavailable)

Elevation Gains (Raise and Lower)

Elevation Gains determines the speed at which your Topcon P-32 System allows the tow point cylinders to adjustto a change in elevation For faster hydraulic response increase the gain value For slower hydraulic responsedecrease the gain value

The objective is to set the gain so the screed reacts to the change in grade quickly but without ldquoovershootingrdquothe new elevation

Gain Elevation Value Range 1-200

Table 3 Paver Lock Menu Settings

Performance Menu Item Level 1 - Unlocked Level 2 - Moderate Level 3 - Restricted

1 Elevation Gains Available Available Locked

2 Slope Gain Available Available Locked

3 Valve Offsets Available Available Locked

4 Elevation Deadband Available Locked Locked

5 Slope Deadband Available Locked Locked

6 Averaging Available Locked Locked

7 Machine Type Available Available Available

8 Display Available Available Available

9 Units Available Available Available

10 System Info Available Available Available

11 Sonic Tracker 3 Available Available Available

12 Slope Resolution Available Available Available

13 Slope Cal Block Available Available Locked

14 Tech Menu Available Available Available

Before setting the Elevation Gain make sure the machines hydraulic flow controls valves are adjustedfor proper cylinder speed according to the manufacturers recommendations

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1823

lope Gain 15GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Slope Gain

This setting determines the speed at which your Topcon P-32 System allows the tow point cylinders to adjustto a change in slope For faster hydraulic response increase the gain value For slower hydraulic responsedecrease the gain value

The objective is to set the gain so the screed reacts to the change in grade quickly but without ldquoovershootingrdquoOn-Grade Slope Gain should not be set at a higher value than the Elevation Gain on the other side of the paver

Gain Elevation Value Range 1-100

Valve Offsets (Raise and Lower)

Valve Offsets is the minimum amount of electrical signals sent to the valve which causes the hydraulic cylinderto move If the valve offset is too small the sensor will not reach On-Grade Likewise if the valve offset valueis too large the sensor will move too much and overshoot On-Grade

Run the Paver until the hydraulic oil is at normal operating temperature before setting the valve offsets Oncethey are set you should not need to readjust the valve offsets unless the Control Box is moved to a new paveror the hydraulic performance changes

Valve Offset Value Range (Raise and Lower) 1 - 999

Elevation Deadband

Elevation Deadband is the area of the Working Window that is On-Grade While the reference is within that areathe paverrsquos valves are idle (closed) Therefore the wider the Elevation Deadband (On-Grade area) the more areference can move up or down without a correction being initiated Once the signal from the reference is outof the deadband your control box drives the hydraulics to place the reference back in the center of thedeadband

Deadband Elevation Value Range 1ndash30 mm

Before setting the Slope Gain ensure the machines hydraulic flow control valves are adjusted forproper cylinder speed according to the manufacturers recommendations

Do not set slope gain at a higher value than the elevation gain on the other side of the paver A highervalue may cause the slope to be over reactive

Set the Valve Offsets before adjusting elevation and slope gains and averaging

The offset value on one side of the paver may differ from the offset value on the other side of thepaver You must verify the offset values before swapping boxes Use the ldquoLeftrdquo and ldquoRightrdquo labelsprovided

Never attempt to use Valve Offsets to compensate for a slower raise or lower speed of your hydraulicvalves as it causes undershooting or overshooting in Slope Mode and can adversely affect the qualityof the mat

Select the amount of Elevation Deadband carefully Too small of an Elevation Deadband causes thetow point cylinder to constantly hunt up and down while the sensor tries to find On-Grade Too largeof an Elevation Deadband does not allow the sensor to send grade corrections to the values causingunwanted variations in mat thickness

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1923

lope Deadband 16GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Slope Deadband

Slope Deadband defines the size of the on-grade area where no valve corrections are made

Deadband Slope Value Range 0025ndash075

The wider the Slope Deadband the greater the slope can vary without initiating a correction

For example if the operator is grading at a 20 slope and the Slope Deadband is set at 10 the system

reads on-grade anywhere from 195 slope to 205 slope The lower the percentage the tighter the SlopeDeadband

Once the slope signal is out of the Slope Deadband System Five drives the hydraulics back within the SlopeDeadband

Working Window Adjustment

Working Window Adjustment adjusts the working window of the sonic tracker (Figure 5)

Working Window Settings 0ndash500 Off

Default 020

The default setting is 020 which gives 020 ft (61 mm) above and below on-grade Setting the value to Offcompletely disables the working window and allows any target to be seen

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 2023

lope Working Window 17GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Figure 5 Sonic Tracker Working Window

Slope Working Window

Slope Working Window adjusts the working window of the Slope Sensor (Figure 6)

Slope Working Window Value Range 01 - 100 Off

Default 20

The default setting is 20 which gives 20 slope above and below ongrade Setting the value to Off completelydisables the working window

Out of Range

Ongrade

Flashing UpDown Arrow

Solid UpDown Arrow

20rsquo

20rsquo

20rsquo

20rsquo

Working

Window

(Adjustable)

ST-3 Sonic Tracker II

When using the Sonic Tracker II to follow a stringline curb or other elevated reference there is adanger of making an unwanted cut if the Trackerrsquos sonic cone moves away from the target This canoccur if the working window is either off or set as high as the distance between the reference and theground Setting the working window to the default value of 20 (020ft) prevents the automatic controlfrom making such a reaction due to a loss of the target

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 2123

martlink (Elevation and Slope) 18GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Figure 6 Slope Working Window

Smartlink (Elevation and Slope)

Smartlink allows the Control Box to send a percentage of the slopeelevation correction on one side of themachine to the Control Box on the other side of the machine preemptively raising or lowering that hydrauliccylinder to keep the machine at the correct grade Smartlink decreases the lag in correction that can occur onone side of the machine as the second Control Box begins moving the valve without having to wait for thesensor on the other side of the machine to detect and correct for a change in elevationslope

Smartlink Value Range 0 - 100

Default 0

Out of Range

Working Window (Adjustable)

Ongrade

20

20

Ongrade

20

20

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 2223

Warranty 19GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

bull bull bull bull bull bull

Warranty

Topcon laser and electronic positioning equipment are guaranteed against defective material and workmanshipunder normal use and application consistent with this Manual The equipment is guaranteed for the period indicatedon the warranty card accompanying the product starting from the date that the product is sold to the originalpurchaser by Topconrsquos Authorized Dealers1

During the warranty period Topcon will at its option repair or replace this product at no additional charge Repairparts and replacement products will be furnished on an exchange basis and will be either reconditioned or new Thislimited warranty does not include service to repair damage to the product resulting from an accident disastermisuses abuse or modification of the product

Warranty service may be obtained from an authorized Topcon warranty service dealer If this product is deliveredby mail purchaser agrees to insure the product or assume the risk of loss or damage in transit to prepay shippingcharges to the warranty service location and to use the original shipping container or equivalent A letter shouldaccompany the package furnishing a description of the problem andor defect

The purchaserrsquos sole remedy shall be replacement as provided above In no event shall Topcon be liable for anydamages or other claim including any claim for lost profits lost savings or other incidental or consequential damagesarising out of the use of or inability to use the product

1 The warranty against defects in a Topcon battery charger or cable is 90 days

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 2323

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1123

ccessing the Technicianrsquos Menu 3GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Accessing the Technicianrsquos Menu

1 From the Control Screen press the MenuSet button

2 Rotate the Grade Adjustment Knob to scroll through the menu selections displayed on the screen

3 Select Tech Menu and press and hold the Enter button for three (3) seconds to enter the

Technicianrsquos Menu

Figure 4 Accessing the Technicianrsquos Menu

Press MenuSet Button Turn Grade Adjustment Knob Press and Hold

Enter Button for 3 Seconds

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1223

Technicianrsquos Menu 9GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

bull bull bull bull bull bull

Technicianrsquos Menu

This chapter describes the Technicianrsquos Menu items and their default factory settings

Table 1 lists the available menus

Table 1 Technicianrsquos Menu Settings

Menu Item Range Default Factory Setting

Configuration External 0ndash31 Custom External

Averaging 1 ndash 100 50

Valve Type Solenoid ProportionalDanfoss Pulse WidthModulated

Proportional

Valve Drive Sink Source Sink

Dither Amplitude 0ndash15 4

Dither Frequency 0ndash105 42

Frequency 1ndash13Hz

225ndash1950Hz

5Hz

Max Current 067ndash48 Amps 175 Amps

Hour Read only Hours 00

Hours Auto 00

External Auto On Off Invert Off

Auto Power Up (Paver only) On Off On

Esup2 Reset Cancel Reset Cancel

Lock Menu Level 1 - Unlocked

Level 2 - Moderate

Level 3 - Restricted

Level 1 - Unlocked

Elevation Gains Raise 1 ndash 200 Raise 25

Lower 1 ndash 200 Lower 25

Slope Gain 1 ndash 100 25

Valve Offsets Raise 1 ndash 999 Raise 135

Lower 1 ndash 999 Lower 135

Elevation Deadband 1 ndash 30 mm 3 mm

Slope Deadband 0025 ndash 075 0075

Working Window 0ndash500 Off 020 ft

Slope Working Window 01-100 20

Smartlink Slope 0 - 100 Slope 0

Elevation 0 - 100 Elevation 0

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1323

onfiguration 10GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Configuration

This setting selects a valve drive configuration and has up to 32 preprogrammed configurations to select from You may also create a custom configuration

Configuration Value Range External 0-31 Custom

Default External

bull External ndash Upon power up the control box looks for an external configuration resistor between pins Land K of the 11 pin bulkhead connector and defaults to the listed configuration table for valve control

The configuration number displays on the control box LCD when the box is turned onbull Value between 0-31 ndash The control box defaults to the valve control parameters for this number listed inthe configuration chart (see Table 2 on page 10) The configuration number displays on the control boxLCD when the box is turned on

bull Custom ndash Create a custom valve control configuration by setting the Valve Type Current DirectionCurrent Limit Frequency (for PWM modes and Solenoid) Dither Amplitude (except Solenoid mode) andDither Frequency (except Solenoid mode)

Configuration Codes

Table 2 lists available configurations

Table 2 Configuration Codes

ConfigResistor

(ohms)

Drive Type Current Direction Dither Amplitude Dither Freq Freq Hz Current Limit

0 0 Sol Sink None None Adj None

1 77

2 160

3 249

4 341

5 441 Sol Source None None Adj None

6 560 Sol Source None None Adj None

7 670

8 800 Sol Source None None Adj None

9 940 Sol Source None None Adj None10 1100 Sol Sink None None Adj None

11 1260 Sol Source None None Adj

12 1445

14 1890

15 2140 Pro Cur Source 6 42 NA 175A

17 2760 Sol Sink None None Adj None

18 3140 Sol Sink None None Adj None

19 3583 Sol Source None None Adj None

20 4104 Sol Sink None None Adj None

21 4725 Sol Sink None None Adj None

22 5480 Sol

23 6414

26 11310 Sol Source None None Adj None

27 14440

28 19440

29 28670

30 51500 Pro Cur Source 12 42 NA 175A

31 open Pro Cur Sink 6 42 NA 175A

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1423

veraging 11GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Averaging

Averaging changes the amount of dampening or filtering applied to the laser receiver or elevation sensormeasurements Averaging can be thought of as the time period over which a running average of the elevationmeasurement is calculated

Averaging Value Range 1ndash100

Default 50

A lower value averages fewer elevation measurements allowing the system to react more quickly to grade

changes

A larger value averages more elevation measurements making the system less reactive to fluctuations in gradesuch as with laser ldquobeam bouncerdquo on windy days

Valve Type

Valve Type allows you to select the type of valves used on your machine

Valve Type Value Range Solenoid Servo Proportional Danfoss Pulse PWMDefault Proportional

The following sections describe each of these valve types

Proportional Current

Proportional Current provides a current regulated proportional output and is the preferred setting forproportional valves

A percentage of the total current setting is calculated based on the gain setting and given grade correctionProportional Current control applies full machine voltage to the valve coil until the desired current is reachedthen the voltage is turned off When the current drops below the desired value the process is repeated

Proportional Pulse Width Modulated

Proportional Pulse Width Modulated provides a pulse width regulated proportional output

A percentage of the total duty cycle is calculated based on the gain setting and the given grade correction PulseWidth Modulation cycles the output voltage on and off at the desired duty cycle

Solenoid

Solenoid operates the same as PWM mode except set up specifically for the lower frequency solenoid valves

Danfoss

Danfoss provides a proportional voltage output to drive the specific requirements of the Danfoss brand ofproportional valves In this mode switched power (Vsw) and ground connect to the Danfoss valve through thevalve cable and the Raise output pin of the control box controls the reference signal to the valve In a neutral(no grade) correction output the reference signal is held at half of the switched voltage For example if a 12volt system produced 13 volts on the Vsw line 65 volts are held on the reference output for a no correctionsignal

bull For a raise correction signal the control box increases the reference voltage from 65 to a maximum of975 V

Averaging does not affect slope control

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1523

alve Drive 12GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

bull For a lower output signal the control box decreases the reference voltage to a minimum of 325 V

Valve Drive

Valve Drive selects the current direction of the valves on the machine

Valve Drive Value Range Sink Source

Select Sink if the valve has a permanent positive connection and needs a switched negative connection (thecontrol box sinks current)

Select Source if the valve has a permanent ground (negative) connection and needs a switched positiveconnection (the control box sources current)

Dither Amplitude

Dither Amplitude allows you to select the amount of dither to apply to the valve

Dither is a continuous low frequency ldquopulserdquo applied to the valve drive signal for proportional valves to keep thevalversquos spool from sticking

Dither Amplitude Value Range 0ndash15

Dither Amplitude is a percentage of full current for the Proportional Current valve type or duty cycle for thePWM valve type Dither does not apply for Solenoid Danfoss or Servo valve types

Dither Frequency

Dither Frequency adjusts the frequency of the dither in cycles per second

Dither Frequency Value Range 0ndash105 Hz

Frequency

Frequency adjusts the number of pulses sent to control valves in one secondFrequency Value Range 1ndash13 Hz 225ndash1950 Hz

The frequency value is adjustable from 1 to 13 Hz for Solenoid valves On Pulse Width Modulated mode valvesthe range is 225 to 1950 Hz

Max Current

Max Current adjusts the maximum valve drive current that the control box outputs when using ProportionalCurrent valve output mode and the over-current trip level for other valve types

Current Limit Value Range 067ndash48 Amps

If a Danfoss valve sees a reference voltage greater than 75 of Vsw or below 25 of Vsw the valvedefaults to an ldquoerrorrdquo state and the valve is held in the neutral position

Frequency does not apply for Proportional Current and Danfoss valve types

Changing the Frequency has an effect on the Offset Check the Offset after changing theFrequency

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1623

our 13GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Hour

Hour displays the amount of hours the control box has been operating and the amount of hours the control boxhas been operating in Automatic

Hour Settings No settings (read only)

External Auto

External Auto disables or enables an external automanual switch

External Auto Settings OnOffInvert

If On is selected the system requires both an external AM switch and activation of the Control Boxrsquos Autobutton to switch the system in and out of Automatic control Activate the external AM switch by connectingpin E of the 11 PIN bulkhead to ground

If you select Invert connecting pin E to ground takes the system out of Automatic control Automatic controlactivates only when pin E is connected to power such as when connecting to an in-motion switch

Auto Power (Paver Only)

The Auto Power setting allows the system to automatically power up to the last used mode

Auto Power Settings OnOff

When the Auto Power setting is On the system powers up in the last mode seen before power down (Auto orManual) For example the paver is in automatic control is shut down and then powered up once more Thepaver is now ready to pave in Auto

When the Auto Power setting is Off the operator must press the Auto button to return to Auto after a powerdown

Esup2 Reset

Esup2 Reset reconfigures the system to factory settings

Esup2 Reset Settings Range CancelReset

To reset all settings in the Performance Menu and the Technician Menu to factory defaults select Reset and press and hold the Enter button for three (3) seconds

To cancel and return to the previous screen select Cancel

Lock Menu

The Lock-Out Setting allows certain Performance Settings in the Performance Menu to be made inaccessibleto the operator (see ldquoPaver Lock Menu Settingsrdquo on page 14)

If the Auto Power setting is On the machine powers up in Auto any time it was shut down in AutoOnly use Auto Power On in asphalt paver applications

Setting Auto Power to On for a machine other than asphalt pavers is not recommended Seriousinjury to operators or bystanders from unexpected machine movement could result

If you select Reset the Control Box reverts your custom Control Box settings back to their factorydefault values

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1723

levation Gains (Raise and Lower) 14GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Lock-Out Value Range Level 1 - Unlocked Level2 - Moderate Level 3 - Restricted

bull Level 1 ndash all Performance Menu items are accessible to the operator

bull Level 2ndash some items no longer appear in the Performance Menu and are only accessible in theTechnicianrsquos Menu

bull Level 3 ndash additional items no longer appear in the Performance Menu and are only accessible in theTechnicianrsquos Menu

Lock Menu Settings

Table 3 lists the settings that can be locked out (made unavailable)

Elevation Gains (Raise and Lower)

Elevation Gains determines the speed at which your Topcon P-32 System allows the tow point cylinders to adjustto a change in elevation For faster hydraulic response increase the gain value For slower hydraulic responsedecrease the gain value

The objective is to set the gain so the screed reacts to the change in grade quickly but without ldquoovershootingrdquothe new elevation

Gain Elevation Value Range 1-200

Table 3 Paver Lock Menu Settings

Performance Menu Item Level 1 - Unlocked Level 2 - Moderate Level 3 - Restricted

1 Elevation Gains Available Available Locked

2 Slope Gain Available Available Locked

3 Valve Offsets Available Available Locked

4 Elevation Deadband Available Locked Locked

5 Slope Deadband Available Locked Locked

6 Averaging Available Locked Locked

7 Machine Type Available Available Available

8 Display Available Available Available

9 Units Available Available Available

10 System Info Available Available Available

11 Sonic Tracker 3 Available Available Available

12 Slope Resolution Available Available Available

13 Slope Cal Block Available Available Locked

14 Tech Menu Available Available Available

Before setting the Elevation Gain make sure the machines hydraulic flow controls valves are adjustedfor proper cylinder speed according to the manufacturers recommendations

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1823

lope Gain 15GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Slope Gain

This setting determines the speed at which your Topcon P-32 System allows the tow point cylinders to adjustto a change in slope For faster hydraulic response increase the gain value For slower hydraulic responsedecrease the gain value

The objective is to set the gain so the screed reacts to the change in grade quickly but without ldquoovershootingrdquoOn-Grade Slope Gain should not be set at a higher value than the Elevation Gain on the other side of the paver

Gain Elevation Value Range 1-100

Valve Offsets (Raise and Lower)

Valve Offsets is the minimum amount of electrical signals sent to the valve which causes the hydraulic cylinderto move If the valve offset is too small the sensor will not reach On-Grade Likewise if the valve offset valueis too large the sensor will move too much and overshoot On-Grade

Run the Paver until the hydraulic oil is at normal operating temperature before setting the valve offsets Oncethey are set you should not need to readjust the valve offsets unless the Control Box is moved to a new paveror the hydraulic performance changes

Valve Offset Value Range (Raise and Lower) 1 - 999

Elevation Deadband

Elevation Deadband is the area of the Working Window that is On-Grade While the reference is within that areathe paverrsquos valves are idle (closed) Therefore the wider the Elevation Deadband (On-Grade area) the more areference can move up or down without a correction being initiated Once the signal from the reference is outof the deadband your control box drives the hydraulics to place the reference back in the center of thedeadband

Deadband Elevation Value Range 1ndash30 mm

Before setting the Slope Gain ensure the machines hydraulic flow control valves are adjusted forproper cylinder speed according to the manufacturers recommendations

Do not set slope gain at a higher value than the elevation gain on the other side of the paver A highervalue may cause the slope to be over reactive

Set the Valve Offsets before adjusting elevation and slope gains and averaging

The offset value on one side of the paver may differ from the offset value on the other side of thepaver You must verify the offset values before swapping boxes Use the ldquoLeftrdquo and ldquoRightrdquo labelsprovided

Never attempt to use Valve Offsets to compensate for a slower raise or lower speed of your hydraulicvalves as it causes undershooting or overshooting in Slope Mode and can adversely affect the qualityof the mat

Select the amount of Elevation Deadband carefully Too small of an Elevation Deadband causes thetow point cylinder to constantly hunt up and down while the sensor tries to find On-Grade Too largeof an Elevation Deadband does not allow the sensor to send grade corrections to the values causingunwanted variations in mat thickness

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1923

lope Deadband 16GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Slope Deadband

Slope Deadband defines the size of the on-grade area where no valve corrections are made

Deadband Slope Value Range 0025ndash075

The wider the Slope Deadband the greater the slope can vary without initiating a correction

For example if the operator is grading at a 20 slope and the Slope Deadband is set at 10 the system

reads on-grade anywhere from 195 slope to 205 slope The lower the percentage the tighter the SlopeDeadband

Once the slope signal is out of the Slope Deadband System Five drives the hydraulics back within the SlopeDeadband

Working Window Adjustment

Working Window Adjustment adjusts the working window of the sonic tracker (Figure 5)

Working Window Settings 0ndash500 Off

Default 020

The default setting is 020 which gives 020 ft (61 mm) above and below on-grade Setting the value to Offcompletely disables the working window and allows any target to be seen

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 2023

lope Working Window 17GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Figure 5 Sonic Tracker Working Window

Slope Working Window

Slope Working Window adjusts the working window of the Slope Sensor (Figure 6)

Slope Working Window Value Range 01 - 100 Off

Default 20

The default setting is 20 which gives 20 slope above and below ongrade Setting the value to Off completelydisables the working window

Out of Range

Ongrade

Flashing UpDown Arrow

Solid UpDown Arrow

20rsquo

20rsquo

20rsquo

20rsquo

Working

Window

(Adjustable)

ST-3 Sonic Tracker II

When using the Sonic Tracker II to follow a stringline curb or other elevated reference there is adanger of making an unwanted cut if the Trackerrsquos sonic cone moves away from the target This canoccur if the working window is either off or set as high as the distance between the reference and theground Setting the working window to the default value of 20 (020ft) prevents the automatic controlfrom making such a reaction due to a loss of the target

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 2123

martlink (Elevation and Slope) 18GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Figure 6 Slope Working Window

Smartlink (Elevation and Slope)

Smartlink allows the Control Box to send a percentage of the slopeelevation correction on one side of themachine to the Control Box on the other side of the machine preemptively raising or lowering that hydrauliccylinder to keep the machine at the correct grade Smartlink decreases the lag in correction that can occur onone side of the machine as the second Control Box begins moving the valve without having to wait for thesensor on the other side of the machine to detect and correct for a change in elevationslope

Smartlink Value Range 0 - 100

Default 0

Out of Range

Working Window (Adjustable)

Ongrade

20

20

Ongrade

20

20

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 2223

Warranty 19GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

bull bull bull bull bull bull

Warranty

Topcon laser and electronic positioning equipment are guaranteed against defective material and workmanshipunder normal use and application consistent with this Manual The equipment is guaranteed for the period indicatedon the warranty card accompanying the product starting from the date that the product is sold to the originalpurchaser by Topconrsquos Authorized Dealers1

During the warranty period Topcon will at its option repair or replace this product at no additional charge Repairparts and replacement products will be furnished on an exchange basis and will be either reconditioned or new Thislimited warranty does not include service to repair damage to the product resulting from an accident disastermisuses abuse or modification of the product

Warranty service may be obtained from an authorized Topcon warranty service dealer If this product is deliveredby mail purchaser agrees to insure the product or assume the risk of loss or damage in transit to prepay shippingcharges to the warranty service location and to use the original shipping container or equivalent A letter shouldaccompany the package furnishing a description of the problem andor defect

The purchaserrsquos sole remedy shall be replacement as provided above In no event shall Topcon be liable for anydamages or other claim including any claim for lost profits lost savings or other incidental or consequential damagesarising out of the use of or inability to use the product

1 The warranty against defects in a Topcon battery charger or cable is 90 days

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 2323

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1223

Technicianrsquos Menu 9GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

bull bull bull bull bull bull

Technicianrsquos Menu

This chapter describes the Technicianrsquos Menu items and their default factory settings

Table 1 lists the available menus

Table 1 Technicianrsquos Menu Settings

Menu Item Range Default Factory Setting

Configuration External 0ndash31 Custom External

Averaging 1 ndash 100 50

Valve Type Solenoid ProportionalDanfoss Pulse WidthModulated

Proportional

Valve Drive Sink Source Sink

Dither Amplitude 0ndash15 4

Dither Frequency 0ndash105 42

Frequency 1ndash13Hz

225ndash1950Hz

5Hz

Max Current 067ndash48 Amps 175 Amps

Hour Read only Hours 00

Hours Auto 00

External Auto On Off Invert Off

Auto Power Up (Paver only) On Off On

Esup2 Reset Cancel Reset Cancel

Lock Menu Level 1 - Unlocked

Level 2 - Moderate

Level 3 - Restricted

Level 1 - Unlocked

Elevation Gains Raise 1 ndash 200 Raise 25

Lower 1 ndash 200 Lower 25

Slope Gain 1 ndash 100 25

Valve Offsets Raise 1 ndash 999 Raise 135

Lower 1 ndash 999 Lower 135

Elevation Deadband 1 ndash 30 mm 3 mm

Slope Deadband 0025 ndash 075 0075

Working Window 0ndash500 Off 020 ft

Slope Working Window 01-100 20

Smartlink Slope 0 - 100 Slope 0

Elevation 0 - 100 Elevation 0

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1323

onfiguration 10GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Configuration

This setting selects a valve drive configuration and has up to 32 preprogrammed configurations to select from You may also create a custom configuration

Configuration Value Range External 0-31 Custom

Default External

bull External ndash Upon power up the control box looks for an external configuration resistor between pins Land K of the 11 pin bulkhead connector and defaults to the listed configuration table for valve control

The configuration number displays on the control box LCD when the box is turned onbull Value between 0-31 ndash The control box defaults to the valve control parameters for this number listed inthe configuration chart (see Table 2 on page 10) The configuration number displays on the control boxLCD when the box is turned on

bull Custom ndash Create a custom valve control configuration by setting the Valve Type Current DirectionCurrent Limit Frequency (for PWM modes and Solenoid) Dither Amplitude (except Solenoid mode) andDither Frequency (except Solenoid mode)

Configuration Codes

Table 2 lists available configurations

Table 2 Configuration Codes

ConfigResistor

(ohms)

Drive Type Current Direction Dither Amplitude Dither Freq Freq Hz Current Limit

0 0 Sol Sink None None Adj None

1 77

2 160

3 249

4 341

5 441 Sol Source None None Adj None

6 560 Sol Source None None Adj None

7 670

8 800 Sol Source None None Adj None

9 940 Sol Source None None Adj None10 1100 Sol Sink None None Adj None

11 1260 Sol Source None None Adj

12 1445

14 1890

15 2140 Pro Cur Source 6 42 NA 175A

17 2760 Sol Sink None None Adj None

18 3140 Sol Sink None None Adj None

19 3583 Sol Source None None Adj None

20 4104 Sol Sink None None Adj None

21 4725 Sol Sink None None Adj None

22 5480 Sol

23 6414

26 11310 Sol Source None None Adj None

27 14440

28 19440

29 28670

30 51500 Pro Cur Source 12 42 NA 175A

31 open Pro Cur Sink 6 42 NA 175A

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1423

veraging 11GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Averaging

Averaging changes the amount of dampening or filtering applied to the laser receiver or elevation sensormeasurements Averaging can be thought of as the time period over which a running average of the elevationmeasurement is calculated

Averaging Value Range 1ndash100

Default 50

A lower value averages fewer elevation measurements allowing the system to react more quickly to grade

changes

A larger value averages more elevation measurements making the system less reactive to fluctuations in gradesuch as with laser ldquobeam bouncerdquo on windy days

Valve Type

Valve Type allows you to select the type of valves used on your machine

Valve Type Value Range Solenoid Servo Proportional Danfoss Pulse PWMDefault Proportional

The following sections describe each of these valve types

Proportional Current

Proportional Current provides a current regulated proportional output and is the preferred setting forproportional valves

A percentage of the total current setting is calculated based on the gain setting and given grade correctionProportional Current control applies full machine voltage to the valve coil until the desired current is reachedthen the voltage is turned off When the current drops below the desired value the process is repeated

Proportional Pulse Width Modulated

Proportional Pulse Width Modulated provides a pulse width regulated proportional output

A percentage of the total duty cycle is calculated based on the gain setting and the given grade correction PulseWidth Modulation cycles the output voltage on and off at the desired duty cycle

Solenoid

Solenoid operates the same as PWM mode except set up specifically for the lower frequency solenoid valves

Danfoss

Danfoss provides a proportional voltage output to drive the specific requirements of the Danfoss brand ofproportional valves In this mode switched power (Vsw) and ground connect to the Danfoss valve through thevalve cable and the Raise output pin of the control box controls the reference signal to the valve In a neutral(no grade) correction output the reference signal is held at half of the switched voltage For example if a 12volt system produced 13 volts on the Vsw line 65 volts are held on the reference output for a no correctionsignal

bull For a raise correction signal the control box increases the reference voltage from 65 to a maximum of975 V

Averaging does not affect slope control

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1523

alve Drive 12GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

bull For a lower output signal the control box decreases the reference voltage to a minimum of 325 V

Valve Drive

Valve Drive selects the current direction of the valves on the machine

Valve Drive Value Range Sink Source

Select Sink if the valve has a permanent positive connection and needs a switched negative connection (thecontrol box sinks current)

Select Source if the valve has a permanent ground (negative) connection and needs a switched positiveconnection (the control box sources current)

Dither Amplitude

Dither Amplitude allows you to select the amount of dither to apply to the valve

Dither is a continuous low frequency ldquopulserdquo applied to the valve drive signal for proportional valves to keep thevalversquos spool from sticking

Dither Amplitude Value Range 0ndash15

Dither Amplitude is a percentage of full current for the Proportional Current valve type or duty cycle for thePWM valve type Dither does not apply for Solenoid Danfoss or Servo valve types

Dither Frequency

Dither Frequency adjusts the frequency of the dither in cycles per second

Dither Frequency Value Range 0ndash105 Hz

Frequency

Frequency adjusts the number of pulses sent to control valves in one secondFrequency Value Range 1ndash13 Hz 225ndash1950 Hz

The frequency value is adjustable from 1 to 13 Hz for Solenoid valves On Pulse Width Modulated mode valvesthe range is 225 to 1950 Hz

Max Current

Max Current adjusts the maximum valve drive current that the control box outputs when using ProportionalCurrent valve output mode and the over-current trip level for other valve types

Current Limit Value Range 067ndash48 Amps

If a Danfoss valve sees a reference voltage greater than 75 of Vsw or below 25 of Vsw the valvedefaults to an ldquoerrorrdquo state and the valve is held in the neutral position

Frequency does not apply for Proportional Current and Danfoss valve types

Changing the Frequency has an effect on the Offset Check the Offset after changing theFrequency

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1623

our 13GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Hour

Hour displays the amount of hours the control box has been operating and the amount of hours the control boxhas been operating in Automatic

Hour Settings No settings (read only)

External Auto

External Auto disables or enables an external automanual switch

External Auto Settings OnOffInvert

If On is selected the system requires both an external AM switch and activation of the Control Boxrsquos Autobutton to switch the system in and out of Automatic control Activate the external AM switch by connectingpin E of the 11 PIN bulkhead to ground

If you select Invert connecting pin E to ground takes the system out of Automatic control Automatic controlactivates only when pin E is connected to power such as when connecting to an in-motion switch

Auto Power (Paver Only)

The Auto Power setting allows the system to automatically power up to the last used mode

Auto Power Settings OnOff

When the Auto Power setting is On the system powers up in the last mode seen before power down (Auto orManual) For example the paver is in automatic control is shut down and then powered up once more Thepaver is now ready to pave in Auto

When the Auto Power setting is Off the operator must press the Auto button to return to Auto after a powerdown

Esup2 Reset

Esup2 Reset reconfigures the system to factory settings

Esup2 Reset Settings Range CancelReset

To reset all settings in the Performance Menu and the Technician Menu to factory defaults select Reset and press and hold the Enter button for three (3) seconds

To cancel and return to the previous screen select Cancel

Lock Menu

The Lock-Out Setting allows certain Performance Settings in the Performance Menu to be made inaccessibleto the operator (see ldquoPaver Lock Menu Settingsrdquo on page 14)

If the Auto Power setting is On the machine powers up in Auto any time it was shut down in AutoOnly use Auto Power On in asphalt paver applications

Setting Auto Power to On for a machine other than asphalt pavers is not recommended Seriousinjury to operators or bystanders from unexpected machine movement could result

If you select Reset the Control Box reverts your custom Control Box settings back to their factorydefault values

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1723

levation Gains (Raise and Lower) 14GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Lock-Out Value Range Level 1 - Unlocked Level2 - Moderate Level 3 - Restricted

bull Level 1 ndash all Performance Menu items are accessible to the operator

bull Level 2ndash some items no longer appear in the Performance Menu and are only accessible in theTechnicianrsquos Menu

bull Level 3 ndash additional items no longer appear in the Performance Menu and are only accessible in theTechnicianrsquos Menu

Lock Menu Settings

Table 3 lists the settings that can be locked out (made unavailable)

Elevation Gains (Raise and Lower)

Elevation Gains determines the speed at which your Topcon P-32 System allows the tow point cylinders to adjustto a change in elevation For faster hydraulic response increase the gain value For slower hydraulic responsedecrease the gain value

The objective is to set the gain so the screed reacts to the change in grade quickly but without ldquoovershootingrdquothe new elevation

Gain Elevation Value Range 1-200

Table 3 Paver Lock Menu Settings

Performance Menu Item Level 1 - Unlocked Level 2 - Moderate Level 3 - Restricted

1 Elevation Gains Available Available Locked

2 Slope Gain Available Available Locked

3 Valve Offsets Available Available Locked

4 Elevation Deadband Available Locked Locked

5 Slope Deadband Available Locked Locked

6 Averaging Available Locked Locked

7 Machine Type Available Available Available

8 Display Available Available Available

9 Units Available Available Available

10 System Info Available Available Available

11 Sonic Tracker 3 Available Available Available

12 Slope Resolution Available Available Available

13 Slope Cal Block Available Available Locked

14 Tech Menu Available Available Available

Before setting the Elevation Gain make sure the machines hydraulic flow controls valves are adjustedfor proper cylinder speed according to the manufacturers recommendations

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1823

lope Gain 15GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Slope Gain

This setting determines the speed at which your Topcon P-32 System allows the tow point cylinders to adjustto a change in slope For faster hydraulic response increase the gain value For slower hydraulic responsedecrease the gain value

The objective is to set the gain so the screed reacts to the change in grade quickly but without ldquoovershootingrdquoOn-Grade Slope Gain should not be set at a higher value than the Elevation Gain on the other side of the paver

Gain Elevation Value Range 1-100

Valve Offsets (Raise and Lower)

Valve Offsets is the minimum amount of electrical signals sent to the valve which causes the hydraulic cylinderto move If the valve offset is too small the sensor will not reach On-Grade Likewise if the valve offset valueis too large the sensor will move too much and overshoot On-Grade

Run the Paver until the hydraulic oil is at normal operating temperature before setting the valve offsets Oncethey are set you should not need to readjust the valve offsets unless the Control Box is moved to a new paveror the hydraulic performance changes

Valve Offset Value Range (Raise and Lower) 1 - 999

Elevation Deadband

Elevation Deadband is the area of the Working Window that is On-Grade While the reference is within that areathe paverrsquos valves are idle (closed) Therefore the wider the Elevation Deadband (On-Grade area) the more areference can move up or down without a correction being initiated Once the signal from the reference is outof the deadband your control box drives the hydraulics to place the reference back in the center of thedeadband

Deadband Elevation Value Range 1ndash30 mm

Before setting the Slope Gain ensure the machines hydraulic flow control valves are adjusted forproper cylinder speed according to the manufacturers recommendations

Do not set slope gain at a higher value than the elevation gain on the other side of the paver A highervalue may cause the slope to be over reactive

Set the Valve Offsets before adjusting elevation and slope gains and averaging

The offset value on one side of the paver may differ from the offset value on the other side of thepaver You must verify the offset values before swapping boxes Use the ldquoLeftrdquo and ldquoRightrdquo labelsprovided

Never attempt to use Valve Offsets to compensate for a slower raise or lower speed of your hydraulicvalves as it causes undershooting or overshooting in Slope Mode and can adversely affect the qualityof the mat

Select the amount of Elevation Deadband carefully Too small of an Elevation Deadband causes thetow point cylinder to constantly hunt up and down while the sensor tries to find On-Grade Too largeof an Elevation Deadband does not allow the sensor to send grade corrections to the values causingunwanted variations in mat thickness

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1923

lope Deadband 16GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Slope Deadband

Slope Deadband defines the size of the on-grade area where no valve corrections are made

Deadband Slope Value Range 0025ndash075

The wider the Slope Deadband the greater the slope can vary without initiating a correction

For example if the operator is grading at a 20 slope and the Slope Deadband is set at 10 the system

reads on-grade anywhere from 195 slope to 205 slope The lower the percentage the tighter the SlopeDeadband

Once the slope signal is out of the Slope Deadband System Five drives the hydraulics back within the SlopeDeadband

Working Window Adjustment

Working Window Adjustment adjusts the working window of the sonic tracker (Figure 5)

Working Window Settings 0ndash500 Off

Default 020

The default setting is 020 which gives 020 ft (61 mm) above and below on-grade Setting the value to Offcompletely disables the working window and allows any target to be seen

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 2023

lope Working Window 17GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Figure 5 Sonic Tracker Working Window

Slope Working Window

Slope Working Window adjusts the working window of the Slope Sensor (Figure 6)

Slope Working Window Value Range 01 - 100 Off

Default 20

The default setting is 20 which gives 20 slope above and below ongrade Setting the value to Off completelydisables the working window

Out of Range

Ongrade

Flashing UpDown Arrow

Solid UpDown Arrow

20rsquo

20rsquo

20rsquo

20rsquo

Working

Window

(Adjustable)

ST-3 Sonic Tracker II

When using the Sonic Tracker II to follow a stringline curb or other elevated reference there is adanger of making an unwanted cut if the Trackerrsquos sonic cone moves away from the target This canoccur if the working window is either off or set as high as the distance between the reference and theground Setting the working window to the default value of 20 (020ft) prevents the automatic controlfrom making such a reaction due to a loss of the target

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 2123

martlink (Elevation and Slope) 18GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Figure 6 Slope Working Window

Smartlink (Elevation and Slope)

Smartlink allows the Control Box to send a percentage of the slopeelevation correction on one side of themachine to the Control Box on the other side of the machine preemptively raising or lowering that hydrauliccylinder to keep the machine at the correct grade Smartlink decreases the lag in correction that can occur onone side of the machine as the second Control Box begins moving the valve without having to wait for thesensor on the other side of the machine to detect and correct for a change in elevationslope

Smartlink Value Range 0 - 100

Default 0

Out of Range

Working Window (Adjustable)

Ongrade

20

20

Ongrade

20

20

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 2223

Warranty 19GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

bull bull bull bull bull bull

Warranty

Topcon laser and electronic positioning equipment are guaranteed against defective material and workmanshipunder normal use and application consistent with this Manual The equipment is guaranteed for the period indicatedon the warranty card accompanying the product starting from the date that the product is sold to the originalpurchaser by Topconrsquos Authorized Dealers1

During the warranty period Topcon will at its option repair or replace this product at no additional charge Repairparts and replacement products will be furnished on an exchange basis and will be either reconditioned or new Thislimited warranty does not include service to repair damage to the product resulting from an accident disastermisuses abuse or modification of the product

Warranty service may be obtained from an authorized Topcon warranty service dealer If this product is deliveredby mail purchaser agrees to insure the product or assume the risk of loss or damage in transit to prepay shippingcharges to the warranty service location and to use the original shipping container or equivalent A letter shouldaccompany the package furnishing a description of the problem andor defect

The purchaserrsquos sole remedy shall be replacement as provided above In no event shall Topcon be liable for anydamages or other claim including any claim for lost profits lost savings or other incidental or consequential damagesarising out of the use of or inability to use the product

1 The warranty against defects in a Topcon battery charger or cable is 90 days

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 2323

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1323

onfiguration 10GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Configuration

This setting selects a valve drive configuration and has up to 32 preprogrammed configurations to select from You may also create a custom configuration

Configuration Value Range External 0-31 Custom

Default External

bull External ndash Upon power up the control box looks for an external configuration resistor between pins Land K of the 11 pin bulkhead connector and defaults to the listed configuration table for valve control

The configuration number displays on the control box LCD when the box is turned onbull Value between 0-31 ndash The control box defaults to the valve control parameters for this number listed inthe configuration chart (see Table 2 on page 10) The configuration number displays on the control boxLCD when the box is turned on

bull Custom ndash Create a custom valve control configuration by setting the Valve Type Current DirectionCurrent Limit Frequency (for PWM modes and Solenoid) Dither Amplitude (except Solenoid mode) andDither Frequency (except Solenoid mode)

Configuration Codes

Table 2 lists available configurations

Table 2 Configuration Codes

ConfigResistor

(ohms)

Drive Type Current Direction Dither Amplitude Dither Freq Freq Hz Current Limit

0 0 Sol Sink None None Adj None

1 77

2 160

3 249

4 341

5 441 Sol Source None None Adj None

6 560 Sol Source None None Adj None

7 670

8 800 Sol Source None None Adj None

9 940 Sol Source None None Adj None10 1100 Sol Sink None None Adj None

11 1260 Sol Source None None Adj

12 1445

14 1890

15 2140 Pro Cur Source 6 42 NA 175A

17 2760 Sol Sink None None Adj None

18 3140 Sol Sink None None Adj None

19 3583 Sol Source None None Adj None

20 4104 Sol Sink None None Adj None

21 4725 Sol Sink None None Adj None

22 5480 Sol

23 6414

26 11310 Sol Source None None Adj None

27 14440

28 19440

29 28670

30 51500 Pro Cur Source 12 42 NA 175A

31 open Pro Cur Sink 6 42 NA 175A

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1423

veraging 11GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Averaging

Averaging changes the amount of dampening or filtering applied to the laser receiver or elevation sensormeasurements Averaging can be thought of as the time period over which a running average of the elevationmeasurement is calculated

Averaging Value Range 1ndash100

Default 50

A lower value averages fewer elevation measurements allowing the system to react more quickly to grade

changes

A larger value averages more elevation measurements making the system less reactive to fluctuations in gradesuch as with laser ldquobeam bouncerdquo on windy days

Valve Type

Valve Type allows you to select the type of valves used on your machine

Valve Type Value Range Solenoid Servo Proportional Danfoss Pulse PWMDefault Proportional

The following sections describe each of these valve types

Proportional Current

Proportional Current provides a current regulated proportional output and is the preferred setting forproportional valves

A percentage of the total current setting is calculated based on the gain setting and given grade correctionProportional Current control applies full machine voltage to the valve coil until the desired current is reachedthen the voltage is turned off When the current drops below the desired value the process is repeated

Proportional Pulse Width Modulated

Proportional Pulse Width Modulated provides a pulse width regulated proportional output

A percentage of the total duty cycle is calculated based on the gain setting and the given grade correction PulseWidth Modulation cycles the output voltage on and off at the desired duty cycle

Solenoid

Solenoid operates the same as PWM mode except set up specifically for the lower frequency solenoid valves

Danfoss

Danfoss provides a proportional voltage output to drive the specific requirements of the Danfoss brand ofproportional valves In this mode switched power (Vsw) and ground connect to the Danfoss valve through thevalve cable and the Raise output pin of the control box controls the reference signal to the valve In a neutral(no grade) correction output the reference signal is held at half of the switched voltage For example if a 12volt system produced 13 volts on the Vsw line 65 volts are held on the reference output for a no correctionsignal

bull For a raise correction signal the control box increases the reference voltage from 65 to a maximum of975 V

Averaging does not affect slope control

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1523

alve Drive 12GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

bull For a lower output signal the control box decreases the reference voltage to a minimum of 325 V

Valve Drive

Valve Drive selects the current direction of the valves on the machine

Valve Drive Value Range Sink Source

Select Sink if the valve has a permanent positive connection and needs a switched negative connection (thecontrol box sinks current)

Select Source if the valve has a permanent ground (negative) connection and needs a switched positiveconnection (the control box sources current)

Dither Amplitude

Dither Amplitude allows you to select the amount of dither to apply to the valve

Dither is a continuous low frequency ldquopulserdquo applied to the valve drive signal for proportional valves to keep thevalversquos spool from sticking

Dither Amplitude Value Range 0ndash15

Dither Amplitude is a percentage of full current for the Proportional Current valve type or duty cycle for thePWM valve type Dither does not apply for Solenoid Danfoss or Servo valve types

Dither Frequency

Dither Frequency adjusts the frequency of the dither in cycles per second

Dither Frequency Value Range 0ndash105 Hz

Frequency

Frequency adjusts the number of pulses sent to control valves in one secondFrequency Value Range 1ndash13 Hz 225ndash1950 Hz

The frequency value is adjustable from 1 to 13 Hz for Solenoid valves On Pulse Width Modulated mode valvesthe range is 225 to 1950 Hz

Max Current

Max Current adjusts the maximum valve drive current that the control box outputs when using ProportionalCurrent valve output mode and the over-current trip level for other valve types

Current Limit Value Range 067ndash48 Amps

If a Danfoss valve sees a reference voltage greater than 75 of Vsw or below 25 of Vsw the valvedefaults to an ldquoerrorrdquo state and the valve is held in the neutral position

Frequency does not apply for Proportional Current and Danfoss valve types

Changing the Frequency has an effect on the Offset Check the Offset after changing theFrequency

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1623

our 13GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Hour

Hour displays the amount of hours the control box has been operating and the amount of hours the control boxhas been operating in Automatic

Hour Settings No settings (read only)

External Auto

External Auto disables or enables an external automanual switch

External Auto Settings OnOffInvert

If On is selected the system requires both an external AM switch and activation of the Control Boxrsquos Autobutton to switch the system in and out of Automatic control Activate the external AM switch by connectingpin E of the 11 PIN bulkhead to ground

If you select Invert connecting pin E to ground takes the system out of Automatic control Automatic controlactivates only when pin E is connected to power such as when connecting to an in-motion switch

Auto Power (Paver Only)

The Auto Power setting allows the system to automatically power up to the last used mode

Auto Power Settings OnOff

When the Auto Power setting is On the system powers up in the last mode seen before power down (Auto orManual) For example the paver is in automatic control is shut down and then powered up once more Thepaver is now ready to pave in Auto

When the Auto Power setting is Off the operator must press the Auto button to return to Auto after a powerdown

Esup2 Reset

Esup2 Reset reconfigures the system to factory settings

Esup2 Reset Settings Range CancelReset

To reset all settings in the Performance Menu and the Technician Menu to factory defaults select Reset and press and hold the Enter button for three (3) seconds

To cancel and return to the previous screen select Cancel

Lock Menu

The Lock-Out Setting allows certain Performance Settings in the Performance Menu to be made inaccessibleto the operator (see ldquoPaver Lock Menu Settingsrdquo on page 14)

If the Auto Power setting is On the machine powers up in Auto any time it was shut down in AutoOnly use Auto Power On in asphalt paver applications

Setting Auto Power to On for a machine other than asphalt pavers is not recommended Seriousinjury to operators or bystanders from unexpected machine movement could result

If you select Reset the Control Box reverts your custom Control Box settings back to their factorydefault values

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1723

levation Gains (Raise and Lower) 14GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Lock-Out Value Range Level 1 - Unlocked Level2 - Moderate Level 3 - Restricted

bull Level 1 ndash all Performance Menu items are accessible to the operator

bull Level 2ndash some items no longer appear in the Performance Menu and are only accessible in theTechnicianrsquos Menu

bull Level 3 ndash additional items no longer appear in the Performance Menu and are only accessible in theTechnicianrsquos Menu

Lock Menu Settings

Table 3 lists the settings that can be locked out (made unavailable)

Elevation Gains (Raise and Lower)

Elevation Gains determines the speed at which your Topcon P-32 System allows the tow point cylinders to adjustto a change in elevation For faster hydraulic response increase the gain value For slower hydraulic responsedecrease the gain value

The objective is to set the gain so the screed reacts to the change in grade quickly but without ldquoovershootingrdquothe new elevation

Gain Elevation Value Range 1-200

Table 3 Paver Lock Menu Settings

Performance Menu Item Level 1 - Unlocked Level 2 - Moderate Level 3 - Restricted

1 Elevation Gains Available Available Locked

2 Slope Gain Available Available Locked

3 Valve Offsets Available Available Locked

4 Elevation Deadband Available Locked Locked

5 Slope Deadband Available Locked Locked

6 Averaging Available Locked Locked

7 Machine Type Available Available Available

8 Display Available Available Available

9 Units Available Available Available

10 System Info Available Available Available

11 Sonic Tracker 3 Available Available Available

12 Slope Resolution Available Available Available

13 Slope Cal Block Available Available Locked

14 Tech Menu Available Available Available

Before setting the Elevation Gain make sure the machines hydraulic flow controls valves are adjustedfor proper cylinder speed according to the manufacturers recommendations

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1823

lope Gain 15GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Slope Gain

This setting determines the speed at which your Topcon P-32 System allows the tow point cylinders to adjustto a change in slope For faster hydraulic response increase the gain value For slower hydraulic responsedecrease the gain value

The objective is to set the gain so the screed reacts to the change in grade quickly but without ldquoovershootingrdquoOn-Grade Slope Gain should not be set at a higher value than the Elevation Gain on the other side of the paver

Gain Elevation Value Range 1-100

Valve Offsets (Raise and Lower)

Valve Offsets is the minimum amount of electrical signals sent to the valve which causes the hydraulic cylinderto move If the valve offset is too small the sensor will not reach On-Grade Likewise if the valve offset valueis too large the sensor will move too much and overshoot On-Grade

Run the Paver until the hydraulic oil is at normal operating temperature before setting the valve offsets Oncethey are set you should not need to readjust the valve offsets unless the Control Box is moved to a new paveror the hydraulic performance changes

Valve Offset Value Range (Raise and Lower) 1 - 999

Elevation Deadband

Elevation Deadband is the area of the Working Window that is On-Grade While the reference is within that areathe paverrsquos valves are idle (closed) Therefore the wider the Elevation Deadband (On-Grade area) the more areference can move up or down without a correction being initiated Once the signal from the reference is outof the deadband your control box drives the hydraulics to place the reference back in the center of thedeadband

Deadband Elevation Value Range 1ndash30 mm

Before setting the Slope Gain ensure the machines hydraulic flow control valves are adjusted forproper cylinder speed according to the manufacturers recommendations

Do not set slope gain at a higher value than the elevation gain on the other side of the paver A highervalue may cause the slope to be over reactive

Set the Valve Offsets before adjusting elevation and slope gains and averaging

The offset value on one side of the paver may differ from the offset value on the other side of thepaver You must verify the offset values before swapping boxes Use the ldquoLeftrdquo and ldquoRightrdquo labelsprovided

Never attempt to use Valve Offsets to compensate for a slower raise or lower speed of your hydraulicvalves as it causes undershooting or overshooting in Slope Mode and can adversely affect the qualityof the mat

Select the amount of Elevation Deadband carefully Too small of an Elevation Deadband causes thetow point cylinder to constantly hunt up and down while the sensor tries to find On-Grade Too largeof an Elevation Deadband does not allow the sensor to send grade corrections to the values causingunwanted variations in mat thickness

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1923

lope Deadband 16GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Slope Deadband

Slope Deadband defines the size of the on-grade area where no valve corrections are made

Deadband Slope Value Range 0025ndash075

The wider the Slope Deadband the greater the slope can vary without initiating a correction

For example if the operator is grading at a 20 slope and the Slope Deadband is set at 10 the system

reads on-grade anywhere from 195 slope to 205 slope The lower the percentage the tighter the SlopeDeadband

Once the slope signal is out of the Slope Deadband System Five drives the hydraulics back within the SlopeDeadband

Working Window Adjustment

Working Window Adjustment adjusts the working window of the sonic tracker (Figure 5)

Working Window Settings 0ndash500 Off

Default 020

The default setting is 020 which gives 020 ft (61 mm) above and below on-grade Setting the value to Offcompletely disables the working window and allows any target to be seen

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 2023

lope Working Window 17GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Figure 5 Sonic Tracker Working Window

Slope Working Window

Slope Working Window adjusts the working window of the Slope Sensor (Figure 6)

Slope Working Window Value Range 01 - 100 Off

Default 20

The default setting is 20 which gives 20 slope above and below ongrade Setting the value to Off completelydisables the working window

Out of Range

Ongrade

Flashing UpDown Arrow

Solid UpDown Arrow

20rsquo

20rsquo

20rsquo

20rsquo

Working

Window

(Adjustable)

ST-3 Sonic Tracker II

When using the Sonic Tracker II to follow a stringline curb or other elevated reference there is adanger of making an unwanted cut if the Trackerrsquos sonic cone moves away from the target This canoccur if the working window is either off or set as high as the distance between the reference and theground Setting the working window to the default value of 20 (020ft) prevents the automatic controlfrom making such a reaction due to a loss of the target

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 2123

martlink (Elevation and Slope) 18GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Figure 6 Slope Working Window

Smartlink (Elevation and Slope)

Smartlink allows the Control Box to send a percentage of the slopeelevation correction on one side of themachine to the Control Box on the other side of the machine preemptively raising or lowering that hydrauliccylinder to keep the machine at the correct grade Smartlink decreases the lag in correction that can occur onone side of the machine as the second Control Box begins moving the valve without having to wait for thesensor on the other side of the machine to detect and correct for a change in elevationslope

Smartlink Value Range 0 - 100

Default 0

Out of Range

Working Window (Adjustable)

Ongrade

20

20

Ongrade

20

20

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 2223

Warranty 19GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

bull bull bull bull bull bull

Warranty

Topcon laser and electronic positioning equipment are guaranteed against defective material and workmanshipunder normal use and application consistent with this Manual The equipment is guaranteed for the period indicatedon the warranty card accompanying the product starting from the date that the product is sold to the originalpurchaser by Topconrsquos Authorized Dealers1

During the warranty period Topcon will at its option repair or replace this product at no additional charge Repairparts and replacement products will be furnished on an exchange basis and will be either reconditioned or new Thislimited warranty does not include service to repair damage to the product resulting from an accident disastermisuses abuse or modification of the product

Warranty service may be obtained from an authorized Topcon warranty service dealer If this product is deliveredby mail purchaser agrees to insure the product or assume the risk of loss or damage in transit to prepay shippingcharges to the warranty service location and to use the original shipping container or equivalent A letter shouldaccompany the package furnishing a description of the problem andor defect

The purchaserrsquos sole remedy shall be replacement as provided above In no event shall Topcon be liable for anydamages or other claim including any claim for lost profits lost savings or other incidental or consequential damagesarising out of the use of or inability to use the product

1 The warranty against defects in a Topcon battery charger or cable is 90 days

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 2323

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1423

veraging 11GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Averaging

Averaging changes the amount of dampening or filtering applied to the laser receiver or elevation sensormeasurements Averaging can be thought of as the time period over which a running average of the elevationmeasurement is calculated

Averaging Value Range 1ndash100

Default 50

A lower value averages fewer elevation measurements allowing the system to react more quickly to grade

changes

A larger value averages more elevation measurements making the system less reactive to fluctuations in gradesuch as with laser ldquobeam bouncerdquo on windy days

Valve Type

Valve Type allows you to select the type of valves used on your machine

Valve Type Value Range Solenoid Servo Proportional Danfoss Pulse PWMDefault Proportional

The following sections describe each of these valve types

Proportional Current

Proportional Current provides a current regulated proportional output and is the preferred setting forproportional valves

A percentage of the total current setting is calculated based on the gain setting and given grade correctionProportional Current control applies full machine voltage to the valve coil until the desired current is reachedthen the voltage is turned off When the current drops below the desired value the process is repeated

Proportional Pulse Width Modulated

Proportional Pulse Width Modulated provides a pulse width regulated proportional output

A percentage of the total duty cycle is calculated based on the gain setting and the given grade correction PulseWidth Modulation cycles the output voltage on and off at the desired duty cycle

Solenoid

Solenoid operates the same as PWM mode except set up specifically for the lower frequency solenoid valves

Danfoss

Danfoss provides a proportional voltage output to drive the specific requirements of the Danfoss brand ofproportional valves In this mode switched power (Vsw) and ground connect to the Danfoss valve through thevalve cable and the Raise output pin of the control box controls the reference signal to the valve In a neutral(no grade) correction output the reference signal is held at half of the switched voltage For example if a 12volt system produced 13 volts on the Vsw line 65 volts are held on the reference output for a no correctionsignal

bull For a raise correction signal the control box increases the reference voltage from 65 to a maximum of975 V

Averaging does not affect slope control

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1523

alve Drive 12GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

bull For a lower output signal the control box decreases the reference voltage to a minimum of 325 V

Valve Drive

Valve Drive selects the current direction of the valves on the machine

Valve Drive Value Range Sink Source

Select Sink if the valve has a permanent positive connection and needs a switched negative connection (thecontrol box sinks current)

Select Source if the valve has a permanent ground (negative) connection and needs a switched positiveconnection (the control box sources current)

Dither Amplitude

Dither Amplitude allows you to select the amount of dither to apply to the valve

Dither is a continuous low frequency ldquopulserdquo applied to the valve drive signal for proportional valves to keep thevalversquos spool from sticking

Dither Amplitude Value Range 0ndash15

Dither Amplitude is a percentage of full current for the Proportional Current valve type or duty cycle for thePWM valve type Dither does not apply for Solenoid Danfoss or Servo valve types

Dither Frequency

Dither Frequency adjusts the frequency of the dither in cycles per second

Dither Frequency Value Range 0ndash105 Hz

Frequency

Frequency adjusts the number of pulses sent to control valves in one secondFrequency Value Range 1ndash13 Hz 225ndash1950 Hz

The frequency value is adjustable from 1 to 13 Hz for Solenoid valves On Pulse Width Modulated mode valvesthe range is 225 to 1950 Hz

Max Current

Max Current adjusts the maximum valve drive current that the control box outputs when using ProportionalCurrent valve output mode and the over-current trip level for other valve types

Current Limit Value Range 067ndash48 Amps

If a Danfoss valve sees a reference voltage greater than 75 of Vsw or below 25 of Vsw the valvedefaults to an ldquoerrorrdquo state and the valve is held in the neutral position

Frequency does not apply for Proportional Current and Danfoss valve types

Changing the Frequency has an effect on the Offset Check the Offset after changing theFrequency

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1623

our 13GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Hour

Hour displays the amount of hours the control box has been operating and the amount of hours the control boxhas been operating in Automatic

Hour Settings No settings (read only)

External Auto

External Auto disables or enables an external automanual switch

External Auto Settings OnOffInvert

If On is selected the system requires both an external AM switch and activation of the Control Boxrsquos Autobutton to switch the system in and out of Automatic control Activate the external AM switch by connectingpin E of the 11 PIN bulkhead to ground

If you select Invert connecting pin E to ground takes the system out of Automatic control Automatic controlactivates only when pin E is connected to power such as when connecting to an in-motion switch

Auto Power (Paver Only)

The Auto Power setting allows the system to automatically power up to the last used mode

Auto Power Settings OnOff

When the Auto Power setting is On the system powers up in the last mode seen before power down (Auto orManual) For example the paver is in automatic control is shut down and then powered up once more Thepaver is now ready to pave in Auto

When the Auto Power setting is Off the operator must press the Auto button to return to Auto after a powerdown

Esup2 Reset

Esup2 Reset reconfigures the system to factory settings

Esup2 Reset Settings Range CancelReset

To reset all settings in the Performance Menu and the Technician Menu to factory defaults select Reset and press and hold the Enter button for three (3) seconds

To cancel and return to the previous screen select Cancel

Lock Menu

The Lock-Out Setting allows certain Performance Settings in the Performance Menu to be made inaccessibleto the operator (see ldquoPaver Lock Menu Settingsrdquo on page 14)

If the Auto Power setting is On the machine powers up in Auto any time it was shut down in AutoOnly use Auto Power On in asphalt paver applications

Setting Auto Power to On for a machine other than asphalt pavers is not recommended Seriousinjury to operators or bystanders from unexpected machine movement could result

If you select Reset the Control Box reverts your custom Control Box settings back to their factorydefault values

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1723

levation Gains (Raise and Lower) 14GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Lock-Out Value Range Level 1 - Unlocked Level2 - Moderate Level 3 - Restricted

bull Level 1 ndash all Performance Menu items are accessible to the operator

bull Level 2ndash some items no longer appear in the Performance Menu and are only accessible in theTechnicianrsquos Menu

bull Level 3 ndash additional items no longer appear in the Performance Menu and are only accessible in theTechnicianrsquos Menu

Lock Menu Settings

Table 3 lists the settings that can be locked out (made unavailable)

Elevation Gains (Raise and Lower)

Elevation Gains determines the speed at which your Topcon P-32 System allows the tow point cylinders to adjustto a change in elevation For faster hydraulic response increase the gain value For slower hydraulic responsedecrease the gain value

The objective is to set the gain so the screed reacts to the change in grade quickly but without ldquoovershootingrdquothe new elevation

Gain Elevation Value Range 1-200

Table 3 Paver Lock Menu Settings

Performance Menu Item Level 1 - Unlocked Level 2 - Moderate Level 3 - Restricted

1 Elevation Gains Available Available Locked

2 Slope Gain Available Available Locked

3 Valve Offsets Available Available Locked

4 Elevation Deadband Available Locked Locked

5 Slope Deadband Available Locked Locked

6 Averaging Available Locked Locked

7 Machine Type Available Available Available

8 Display Available Available Available

9 Units Available Available Available

10 System Info Available Available Available

11 Sonic Tracker 3 Available Available Available

12 Slope Resolution Available Available Available

13 Slope Cal Block Available Available Locked

14 Tech Menu Available Available Available

Before setting the Elevation Gain make sure the machines hydraulic flow controls valves are adjustedfor proper cylinder speed according to the manufacturers recommendations

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1823

lope Gain 15GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Slope Gain

This setting determines the speed at which your Topcon P-32 System allows the tow point cylinders to adjustto a change in slope For faster hydraulic response increase the gain value For slower hydraulic responsedecrease the gain value

The objective is to set the gain so the screed reacts to the change in grade quickly but without ldquoovershootingrdquoOn-Grade Slope Gain should not be set at a higher value than the Elevation Gain on the other side of the paver

Gain Elevation Value Range 1-100

Valve Offsets (Raise and Lower)

Valve Offsets is the minimum amount of electrical signals sent to the valve which causes the hydraulic cylinderto move If the valve offset is too small the sensor will not reach On-Grade Likewise if the valve offset valueis too large the sensor will move too much and overshoot On-Grade

Run the Paver until the hydraulic oil is at normal operating temperature before setting the valve offsets Oncethey are set you should not need to readjust the valve offsets unless the Control Box is moved to a new paveror the hydraulic performance changes

Valve Offset Value Range (Raise and Lower) 1 - 999

Elevation Deadband

Elevation Deadband is the area of the Working Window that is On-Grade While the reference is within that areathe paverrsquos valves are idle (closed) Therefore the wider the Elevation Deadband (On-Grade area) the more areference can move up or down without a correction being initiated Once the signal from the reference is outof the deadband your control box drives the hydraulics to place the reference back in the center of thedeadband

Deadband Elevation Value Range 1ndash30 mm

Before setting the Slope Gain ensure the machines hydraulic flow control valves are adjusted forproper cylinder speed according to the manufacturers recommendations

Do not set slope gain at a higher value than the elevation gain on the other side of the paver A highervalue may cause the slope to be over reactive

Set the Valve Offsets before adjusting elevation and slope gains and averaging

The offset value on one side of the paver may differ from the offset value on the other side of thepaver You must verify the offset values before swapping boxes Use the ldquoLeftrdquo and ldquoRightrdquo labelsprovided

Never attempt to use Valve Offsets to compensate for a slower raise or lower speed of your hydraulicvalves as it causes undershooting or overshooting in Slope Mode and can adversely affect the qualityof the mat

Select the amount of Elevation Deadband carefully Too small of an Elevation Deadband causes thetow point cylinder to constantly hunt up and down while the sensor tries to find On-Grade Too largeof an Elevation Deadband does not allow the sensor to send grade corrections to the values causingunwanted variations in mat thickness

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1923

lope Deadband 16GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Slope Deadband

Slope Deadband defines the size of the on-grade area where no valve corrections are made

Deadband Slope Value Range 0025ndash075

The wider the Slope Deadband the greater the slope can vary without initiating a correction

For example if the operator is grading at a 20 slope and the Slope Deadband is set at 10 the system

reads on-grade anywhere from 195 slope to 205 slope The lower the percentage the tighter the SlopeDeadband

Once the slope signal is out of the Slope Deadband System Five drives the hydraulics back within the SlopeDeadband

Working Window Adjustment

Working Window Adjustment adjusts the working window of the sonic tracker (Figure 5)

Working Window Settings 0ndash500 Off

Default 020

The default setting is 020 which gives 020 ft (61 mm) above and below on-grade Setting the value to Offcompletely disables the working window and allows any target to be seen

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 2023

lope Working Window 17GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Figure 5 Sonic Tracker Working Window

Slope Working Window

Slope Working Window adjusts the working window of the Slope Sensor (Figure 6)

Slope Working Window Value Range 01 - 100 Off

Default 20

The default setting is 20 which gives 20 slope above and below ongrade Setting the value to Off completelydisables the working window

Out of Range

Ongrade

Flashing UpDown Arrow

Solid UpDown Arrow

20rsquo

20rsquo

20rsquo

20rsquo

Working

Window

(Adjustable)

ST-3 Sonic Tracker II

When using the Sonic Tracker II to follow a stringline curb or other elevated reference there is adanger of making an unwanted cut if the Trackerrsquos sonic cone moves away from the target This canoccur if the working window is either off or set as high as the distance between the reference and theground Setting the working window to the default value of 20 (020ft) prevents the automatic controlfrom making such a reaction due to a loss of the target

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 2123

martlink (Elevation and Slope) 18GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Figure 6 Slope Working Window

Smartlink (Elevation and Slope)

Smartlink allows the Control Box to send a percentage of the slopeelevation correction on one side of themachine to the Control Box on the other side of the machine preemptively raising or lowering that hydrauliccylinder to keep the machine at the correct grade Smartlink decreases the lag in correction that can occur onone side of the machine as the second Control Box begins moving the valve without having to wait for thesensor on the other side of the machine to detect and correct for a change in elevationslope

Smartlink Value Range 0 - 100

Default 0

Out of Range

Working Window (Adjustable)

Ongrade

20

20

Ongrade

20

20

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 2223

Warranty 19GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

bull bull bull bull bull bull

Warranty

Topcon laser and electronic positioning equipment are guaranteed against defective material and workmanshipunder normal use and application consistent with this Manual The equipment is guaranteed for the period indicatedon the warranty card accompanying the product starting from the date that the product is sold to the originalpurchaser by Topconrsquos Authorized Dealers1

During the warranty period Topcon will at its option repair or replace this product at no additional charge Repairparts and replacement products will be furnished on an exchange basis and will be either reconditioned or new Thislimited warranty does not include service to repair damage to the product resulting from an accident disastermisuses abuse or modification of the product

Warranty service may be obtained from an authorized Topcon warranty service dealer If this product is deliveredby mail purchaser agrees to insure the product or assume the risk of loss or damage in transit to prepay shippingcharges to the warranty service location and to use the original shipping container or equivalent A letter shouldaccompany the package furnishing a description of the problem andor defect

The purchaserrsquos sole remedy shall be replacement as provided above In no event shall Topcon be liable for anydamages or other claim including any claim for lost profits lost savings or other incidental or consequential damagesarising out of the use of or inability to use the product

1 The warranty against defects in a Topcon battery charger or cable is 90 days

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 2323

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1523

alve Drive 12GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

bull For a lower output signal the control box decreases the reference voltage to a minimum of 325 V

Valve Drive

Valve Drive selects the current direction of the valves on the machine

Valve Drive Value Range Sink Source

Select Sink if the valve has a permanent positive connection and needs a switched negative connection (thecontrol box sinks current)

Select Source if the valve has a permanent ground (negative) connection and needs a switched positiveconnection (the control box sources current)

Dither Amplitude

Dither Amplitude allows you to select the amount of dither to apply to the valve

Dither is a continuous low frequency ldquopulserdquo applied to the valve drive signal for proportional valves to keep thevalversquos spool from sticking

Dither Amplitude Value Range 0ndash15

Dither Amplitude is a percentage of full current for the Proportional Current valve type or duty cycle for thePWM valve type Dither does not apply for Solenoid Danfoss or Servo valve types

Dither Frequency

Dither Frequency adjusts the frequency of the dither in cycles per second

Dither Frequency Value Range 0ndash105 Hz

Frequency

Frequency adjusts the number of pulses sent to control valves in one secondFrequency Value Range 1ndash13 Hz 225ndash1950 Hz

The frequency value is adjustable from 1 to 13 Hz for Solenoid valves On Pulse Width Modulated mode valvesthe range is 225 to 1950 Hz

Max Current

Max Current adjusts the maximum valve drive current that the control box outputs when using ProportionalCurrent valve output mode and the over-current trip level for other valve types

Current Limit Value Range 067ndash48 Amps

If a Danfoss valve sees a reference voltage greater than 75 of Vsw or below 25 of Vsw the valvedefaults to an ldquoerrorrdquo state and the valve is held in the neutral position

Frequency does not apply for Proportional Current and Danfoss valve types

Changing the Frequency has an effect on the Offset Check the Offset after changing theFrequency

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1623

our 13GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Hour

Hour displays the amount of hours the control box has been operating and the amount of hours the control boxhas been operating in Automatic

Hour Settings No settings (read only)

External Auto

External Auto disables or enables an external automanual switch

External Auto Settings OnOffInvert

If On is selected the system requires both an external AM switch and activation of the Control Boxrsquos Autobutton to switch the system in and out of Automatic control Activate the external AM switch by connectingpin E of the 11 PIN bulkhead to ground

If you select Invert connecting pin E to ground takes the system out of Automatic control Automatic controlactivates only when pin E is connected to power such as when connecting to an in-motion switch

Auto Power (Paver Only)

The Auto Power setting allows the system to automatically power up to the last used mode

Auto Power Settings OnOff

When the Auto Power setting is On the system powers up in the last mode seen before power down (Auto orManual) For example the paver is in automatic control is shut down and then powered up once more Thepaver is now ready to pave in Auto

When the Auto Power setting is Off the operator must press the Auto button to return to Auto after a powerdown

Esup2 Reset

Esup2 Reset reconfigures the system to factory settings

Esup2 Reset Settings Range CancelReset

To reset all settings in the Performance Menu and the Technician Menu to factory defaults select Reset and press and hold the Enter button for three (3) seconds

To cancel and return to the previous screen select Cancel

Lock Menu

The Lock-Out Setting allows certain Performance Settings in the Performance Menu to be made inaccessibleto the operator (see ldquoPaver Lock Menu Settingsrdquo on page 14)

If the Auto Power setting is On the machine powers up in Auto any time it was shut down in AutoOnly use Auto Power On in asphalt paver applications

Setting Auto Power to On for a machine other than asphalt pavers is not recommended Seriousinjury to operators or bystanders from unexpected machine movement could result

If you select Reset the Control Box reverts your custom Control Box settings back to their factorydefault values

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1723

levation Gains (Raise and Lower) 14GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Lock-Out Value Range Level 1 - Unlocked Level2 - Moderate Level 3 - Restricted

bull Level 1 ndash all Performance Menu items are accessible to the operator

bull Level 2ndash some items no longer appear in the Performance Menu and are only accessible in theTechnicianrsquos Menu

bull Level 3 ndash additional items no longer appear in the Performance Menu and are only accessible in theTechnicianrsquos Menu

Lock Menu Settings

Table 3 lists the settings that can be locked out (made unavailable)

Elevation Gains (Raise and Lower)

Elevation Gains determines the speed at which your Topcon P-32 System allows the tow point cylinders to adjustto a change in elevation For faster hydraulic response increase the gain value For slower hydraulic responsedecrease the gain value

The objective is to set the gain so the screed reacts to the change in grade quickly but without ldquoovershootingrdquothe new elevation

Gain Elevation Value Range 1-200

Table 3 Paver Lock Menu Settings

Performance Menu Item Level 1 - Unlocked Level 2 - Moderate Level 3 - Restricted

1 Elevation Gains Available Available Locked

2 Slope Gain Available Available Locked

3 Valve Offsets Available Available Locked

4 Elevation Deadband Available Locked Locked

5 Slope Deadband Available Locked Locked

6 Averaging Available Locked Locked

7 Machine Type Available Available Available

8 Display Available Available Available

9 Units Available Available Available

10 System Info Available Available Available

11 Sonic Tracker 3 Available Available Available

12 Slope Resolution Available Available Available

13 Slope Cal Block Available Available Locked

14 Tech Menu Available Available Available

Before setting the Elevation Gain make sure the machines hydraulic flow controls valves are adjustedfor proper cylinder speed according to the manufacturers recommendations

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1823

lope Gain 15GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Slope Gain

This setting determines the speed at which your Topcon P-32 System allows the tow point cylinders to adjustto a change in slope For faster hydraulic response increase the gain value For slower hydraulic responsedecrease the gain value

The objective is to set the gain so the screed reacts to the change in grade quickly but without ldquoovershootingrdquoOn-Grade Slope Gain should not be set at a higher value than the Elevation Gain on the other side of the paver

Gain Elevation Value Range 1-100

Valve Offsets (Raise and Lower)

Valve Offsets is the minimum amount of electrical signals sent to the valve which causes the hydraulic cylinderto move If the valve offset is too small the sensor will not reach On-Grade Likewise if the valve offset valueis too large the sensor will move too much and overshoot On-Grade

Run the Paver until the hydraulic oil is at normal operating temperature before setting the valve offsets Oncethey are set you should not need to readjust the valve offsets unless the Control Box is moved to a new paveror the hydraulic performance changes

Valve Offset Value Range (Raise and Lower) 1 - 999

Elevation Deadband

Elevation Deadband is the area of the Working Window that is On-Grade While the reference is within that areathe paverrsquos valves are idle (closed) Therefore the wider the Elevation Deadband (On-Grade area) the more areference can move up or down without a correction being initiated Once the signal from the reference is outof the deadband your control box drives the hydraulics to place the reference back in the center of thedeadband

Deadband Elevation Value Range 1ndash30 mm

Before setting the Slope Gain ensure the machines hydraulic flow control valves are adjusted forproper cylinder speed according to the manufacturers recommendations

Do not set slope gain at a higher value than the elevation gain on the other side of the paver A highervalue may cause the slope to be over reactive

Set the Valve Offsets before adjusting elevation and slope gains and averaging

The offset value on one side of the paver may differ from the offset value on the other side of thepaver You must verify the offset values before swapping boxes Use the ldquoLeftrdquo and ldquoRightrdquo labelsprovided

Never attempt to use Valve Offsets to compensate for a slower raise or lower speed of your hydraulicvalves as it causes undershooting or overshooting in Slope Mode and can adversely affect the qualityof the mat

Select the amount of Elevation Deadband carefully Too small of an Elevation Deadband causes thetow point cylinder to constantly hunt up and down while the sensor tries to find On-Grade Too largeof an Elevation Deadband does not allow the sensor to send grade corrections to the values causingunwanted variations in mat thickness

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1923

lope Deadband 16GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Slope Deadband

Slope Deadband defines the size of the on-grade area where no valve corrections are made

Deadband Slope Value Range 0025ndash075

The wider the Slope Deadband the greater the slope can vary without initiating a correction

For example if the operator is grading at a 20 slope and the Slope Deadband is set at 10 the system

reads on-grade anywhere from 195 slope to 205 slope The lower the percentage the tighter the SlopeDeadband

Once the slope signal is out of the Slope Deadband System Five drives the hydraulics back within the SlopeDeadband

Working Window Adjustment

Working Window Adjustment adjusts the working window of the sonic tracker (Figure 5)

Working Window Settings 0ndash500 Off

Default 020

The default setting is 020 which gives 020 ft (61 mm) above and below on-grade Setting the value to Offcompletely disables the working window and allows any target to be seen

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 2023

lope Working Window 17GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Figure 5 Sonic Tracker Working Window

Slope Working Window

Slope Working Window adjusts the working window of the Slope Sensor (Figure 6)

Slope Working Window Value Range 01 - 100 Off

Default 20

The default setting is 20 which gives 20 slope above and below ongrade Setting the value to Off completelydisables the working window

Out of Range

Ongrade

Flashing UpDown Arrow

Solid UpDown Arrow

20rsquo

20rsquo

20rsquo

20rsquo

Working

Window

(Adjustable)

ST-3 Sonic Tracker II

When using the Sonic Tracker II to follow a stringline curb or other elevated reference there is adanger of making an unwanted cut if the Trackerrsquos sonic cone moves away from the target This canoccur if the working window is either off or set as high as the distance between the reference and theground Setting the working window to the default value of 20 (020ft) prevents the automatic controlfrom making such a reaction due to a loss of the target

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 2123

martlink (Elevation and Slope) 18GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Figure 6 Slope Working Window

Smartlink (Elevation and Slope)

Smartlink allows the Control Box to send a percentage of the slopeelevation correction on one side of themachine to the Control Box on the other side of the machine preemptively raising or lowering that hydrauliccylinder to keep the machine at the correct grade Smartlink decreases the lag in correction that can occur onone side of the machine as the second Control Box begins moving the valve without having to wait for thesensor on the other side of the machine to detect and correct for a change in elevationslope

Smartlink Value Range 0 - 100

Default 0

Out of Range

Working Window (Adjustable)

Ongrade

20

20

Ongrade

20

20

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 2223

Warranty 19GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

bull bull bull bull bull bull

Warranty

Topcon laser and electronic positioning equipment are guaranteed against defective material and workmanshipunder normal use and application consistent with this Manual The equipment is guaranteed for the period indicatedon the warranty card accompanying the product starting from the date that the product is sold to the originalpurchaser by Topconrsquos Authorized Dealers1

During the warranty period Topcon will at its option repair or replace this product at no additional charge Repairparts and replacement products will be furnished on an exchange basis and will be either reconditioned or new Thislimited warranty does not include service to repair damage to the product resulting from an accident disastermisuses abuse or modification of the product

Warranty service may be obtained from an authorized Topcon warranty service dealer If this product is deliveredby mail purchaser agrees to insure the product or assume the risk of loss or damage in transit to prepay shippingcharges to the warranty service location and to use the original shipping container or equivalent A letter shouldaccompany the package furnishing a description of the problem andor defect

The purchaserrsquos sole remedy shall be replacement as provided above In no event shall Topcon be liable for anydamages or other claim including any claim for lost profits lost savings or other incidental or consequential damagesarising out of the use of or inability to use the product

1 The warranty against defects in a Topcon battery charger or cable is 90 days

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 2323

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1623

our 13GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Hour

Hour displays the amount of hours the control box has been operating and the amount of hours the control boxhas been operating in Automatic

Hour Settings No settings (read only)

External Auto

External Auto disables or enables an external automanual switch

External Auto Settings OnOffInvert

If On is selected the system requires both an external AM switch and activation of the Control Boxrsquos Autobutton to switch the system in and out of Automatic control Activate the external AM switch by connectingpin E of the 11 PIN bulkhead to ground

If you select Invert connecting pin E to ground takes the system out of Automatic control Automatic controlactivates only when pin E is connected to power such as when connecting to an in-motion switch

Auto Power (Paver Only)

The Auto Power setting allows the system to automatically power up to the last used mode

Auto Power Settings OnOff

When the Auto Power setting is On the system powers up in the last mode seen before power down (Auto orManual) For example the paver is in automatic control is shut down and then powered up once more Thepaver is now ready to pave in Auto

When the Auto Power setting is Off the operator must press the Auto button to return to Auto after a powerdown

Esup2 Reset

Esup2 Reset reconfigures the system to factory settings

Esup2 Reset Settings Range CancelReset

To reset all settings in the Performance Menu and the Technician Menu to factory defaults select Reset and press and hold the Enter button for three (3) seconds

To cancel and return to the previous screen select Cancel

Lock Menu

The Lock-Out Setting allows certain Performance Settings in the Performance Menu to be made inaccessibleto the operator (see ldquoPaver Lock Menu Settingsrdquo on page 14)

If the Auto Power setting is On the machine powers up in Auto any time it was shut down in AutoOnly use Auto Power On in asphalt paver applications

Setting Auto Power to On for a machine other than asphalt pavers is not recommended Seriousinjury to operators or bystanders from unexpected machine movement could result

If you select Reset the Control Box reverts your custom Control Box settings back to their factorydefault values

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1723

levation Gains (Raise and Lower) 14GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Lock-Out Value Range Level 1 - Unlocked Level2 - Moderate Level 3 - Restricted

bull Level 1 ndash all Performance Menu items are accessible to the operator

bull Level 2ndash some items no longer appear in the Performance Menu and are only accessible in theTechnicianrsquos Menu

bull Level 3 ndash additional items no longer appear in the Performance Menu and are only accessible in theTechnicianrsquos Menu

Lock Menu Settings

Table 3 lists the settings that can be locked out (made unavailable)

Elevation Gains (Raise and Lower)

Elevation Gains determines the speed at which your Topcon P-32 System allows the tow point cylinders to adjustto a change in elevation For faster hydraulic response increase the gain value For slower hydraulic responsedecrease the gain value

The objective is to set the gain so the screed reacts to the change in grade quickly but without ldquoovershootingrdquothe new elevation

Gain Elevation Value Range 1-200

Table 3 Paver Lock Menu Settings

Performance Menu Item Level 1 - Unlocked Level 2 - Moderate Level 3 - Restricted

1 Elevation Gains Available Available Locked

2 Slope Gain Available Available Locked

3 Valve Offsets Available Available Locked

4 Elevation Deadband Available Locked Locked

5 Slope Deadband Available Locked Locked

6 Averaging Available Locked Locked

7 Machine Type Available Available Available

8 Display Available Available Available

9 Units Available Available Available

10 System Info Available Available Available

11 Sonic Tracker 3 Available Available Available

12 Slope Resolution Available Available Available

13 Slope Cal Block Available Available Locked

14 Tech Menu Available Available Available

Before setting the Elevation Gain make sure the machines hydraulic flow controls valves are adjustedfor proper cylinder speed according to the manufacturers recommendations

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1823

lope Gain 15GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Slope Gain

This setting determines the speed at which your Topcon P-32 System allows the tow point cylinders to adjustto a change in slope For faster hydraulic response increase the gain value For slower hydraulic responsedecrease the gain value

The objective is to set the gain so the screed reacts to the change in grade quickly but without ldquoovershootingrdquoOn-Grade Slope Gain should not be set at a higher value than the Elevation Gain on the other side of the paver

Gain Elevation Value Range 1-100

Valve Offsets (Raise and Lower)

Valve Offsets is the minimum amount of electrical signals sent to the valve which causes the hydraulic cylinderto move If the valve offset is too small the sensor will not reach On-Grade Likewise if the valve offset valueis too large the sensor will move too much and overshoot On-Grade

Run the Paver until the hydraulic oil is at normal operating temperature before setting the valve offsets Oncethey are set you should not need to readjust the valve offsets unless the Control Box is moved to a new paveror the hydraulic performance changes

Valve Offset Value Range (Raise and Lower) 1 - 999

Elevation Deadband

Elevation Deadband is the area of the Working Window that is On-Grade While the reference is within that areathe paverrsquos valves are idle (closed) Therefore the wider the Elevation Deadband (On-Grade area) the more areference can move up or down without a correction being initiated Once the signal from the reference is outof the deadband your control box drives the hydraulics to place the reference back in the center of thedeadband

Deadband Elevation Value Range 1ndash30 mm

Before setting the Slope Gain ensure the machines hydraulic flow control valves are adjusted forproper cylinder speed according to the manufacturers recommendations

Do not set slope gain at a higher value than the elevation gain on the other side of the paver A highervalue may cause the slope to be over reactive

Set the Valve Offsets before adjusting elevation and slope gains and averaging

The offset value on one side of the paver may differ from the offset value on the other side of thepaver You must verify the offset values before swapping boxes Use the ldquoLeftrdquo and ldquoRightrdquo labelsprovided

Never attempt to use Valve Offsets to compensate for a slower raise or lower speed of your hydraulicvalves as it causes undershooting or overshooting in Slope Mode and can adversely affect the qualityof the mat

Select the amount of Elevation Deadband carefully Too small of an Elevation Deadband causes thetow point cylinder to constantly hunt up and down while the sensor tries to find On-Grade Too largeof an Elevation Deadband does not allow the sensor to send grade corrections to the values causingunwanted variations in mat thickness

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1923

lope Deadband 16GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Slope Deadband

Slope Deadband defines the size of the on-grade area where no valve corrections are made

Deadband Slope Value Range 0025ndash075

The wider the Slope Deadband the greater the slope can vary without initiating a correction

For example if the operator is grading at a 20 slope and the Slope Deadband is set at 10 the system

reads on-grade anywhere from 195 slope to 205 slope The lower the percentage the tighter the SlopeDeadband

Once the slope signal is out of the Slope Deadband System Five drives the hydraulics back within the SlopeDeadband

Working Window Adjustment

Working Window Adjustment adjusts the working window of the sonic tracker (Figure 5)

Working Window Settings 0ndash500 Off

Default 020

The default setting is 020 which gives 020 ft (61 mm) above and below on-grade Setting the value to Offcompletely disables the working window and allows any target to be seen

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 2023

lope Working Window 17GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Figure 5 Sonic Tracker Working Window

Slope Working Window

Slope Working Window adjusts the working window of the Slope Sensor (Figure 6)

Slope Working Window Value Range 01 - 100 Off

Default 20

The default setting is 20 which gives 20 slope above and below ongrade Setting the value to Off completelydisables the working window

Out of Range

Ongrade

Flashing UpDown Arrow

Solid UpDown Arrow

20rsquo

20rsquo

20rsquo

20rsquo

Working

Window

(Adjustable)

ST-3 Sonic Tracker II

When using the Sonic Tracker II to follow a stringline curb or other elevated reference there is adanger of making an unwanted cut if the Trackerrsquos sonic cone moves away from the target This canoccur if the working window is either off or set as high as the distance between the reference and theground Setting the working window to the default value of 20 (020ft) prevents the automatic controlfrom making such a reaction due to a loss of the target

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 2123

martlink (Elevation and Slope) 18GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Figure 6 Slope Working Window

Smartlink (Elevation and Slope)

Smartlink allows the Control Box to send a percentage of the slopeelevation correction on one side of themachine to the Control Box on the other side of the machine preemptively raising or lowering that hydrauliccylinder to keep the machine at the correct grade Smartlink decreases the lag in correction that can occur onone side of the machine as the second Control Box begins moving the valve without having to wait for thesensor on the other side of the machine to detect and correct for a change in elevationslope

Smartlink Value Range 0 - 100

Default 0

Out of Range

Working Window (Adjustable)

Ongrade

20

20

Ongrade

20

20

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 2223

Warranty 19GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

bull bull bull bull bull bull

Warranty

Topcon laser and electronic positioning equipment are guaranteed against defective material and workmanshipunder normal use and application consistent with this Manual The equipment is guaranteed for the period indicatedon the warranty card accompanying the product starting from the date that the product is sold to the originalpurchaser by Topconrsquos Authorized Dealers1

During the warranty period Topcon will at its option repair or replace this product at no additional charge Repairparts and replacement products will be furnished on an exchange basis and will be either reconditioned or new Thislimited warranty does not include service to repair damage to the product resulting from an accident disastermisuses abuse or modification of the product

Warranty service may be obtained from an authorized Topcon warranty service dealer If this product is deliveredby mail purchaser agrees to insure the product or assume the risk of loss or damage in transit to prepay shippingcharges to the warranty service location and to use the original shipping container or equivalent A letter shouldaccompany the package furnishing a description of the problem andor defect

The purchaserrsquos sole remedy shall be replacement as provided above In no event shall Topcon be liable for anydamages or other claim including any claim for lost profits lost savings or other incidental or consequential damagesarising out of the use of or inability to use the product

1 The warranty against defects in a Topcon battery charger or cable is 90 days

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 2323

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1723

levation Gains (Raise and Lower) 14GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Lock-Out Value Range Level 1 - Unlocked Level2 - Moderate Level 3 - Restricted

bull Level 1 ndash all Performance Menu items are accessible to the operator

bull Level 2ndash some items no longer appear in the Performance Menu and are only accessible in theTechnicianrsquos Menu

bull Level 3 ndash additional items no longer appear in the Performance Menu and are only accessible in theTechnicianrsquos Menu

Lock Menu Settings

Table 3 lists the settings that can be locked out (made unavailable)

Elevation Gains (Raise and Lower)

Elevation Gains determines the speed at which your Topcon P-32 System allows the tow point cylinders to adjustto a change in elevation For faster hydraulic response increase the gain value For slower hydraulic responsedecrease the gain value

The objective is to set the gain so the screed reacts to the change in grade quickly but without ldquoovershootingrdquothe new elevation

Gain Elevation Value Range 1-200

Table 3 Paver Lock Menu Settings

Performance Menu Item Level 1 - Unlocked Level 2 - Moderate Level 3 - Restricted

1 Elevation Gains Available Available Locked

2 Slope Gain Available Available Locked

3 Valve Offsets Available Available Locked

4 Elevation Deadband Available Locked Locked

5 Slope Deadband Available Locked Locked

6 Averaging Available Locked Locked

7 Machine Type Available Available Available

8 Display Available Available Available

9 Units Available Available Available

10 System Info Available Available Available

11 Sonic Tracker 3 Available Available Available

12 Slope Resolution Available Available Available

13 Slope Cal Block Available Available Locked

14 Tech Menu Available Available Available

Before setting the Elevation Gain make sure the machines hydraulic flow controls valves are adjustedfor proper cylinder speed according to the manufacturers recommendations

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1823

lope Gain 15GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Slope Gain

This setting determines the speed at which your Topcon P-32 System allows the tow point cylinders to adjustto a change in slope For faster hydraulic response increase the gain value For slower hydraulic responsedecrease the gain value

The objective is to set the gain so the screed reacts to the change in grade quickly but without ldquoovershootingrdquoOn-Grade Slope Gain should not be set at a higher value than the Elevation Gain on the other side of the paver

Gain Elevation Value Range 1-100

Valve Offsets (Raise and Lower)

Valve Offsets is the minimum amount of electrical signals sent to the valve which causes the hydraulic cylinderto move If the valve offset is too small the sensor will not reach On-Grade Likewise if the valve offset valueis too large the sensor will move too much and overshoot On-Grade

Run the Paver until the hydraulic oil is at normal operating temperature before setting the valve offsets Oncethey are set you should not need to readjust the valve offsets unless the Control Box is moved to a new paveror the hydraulic performance changes

Valve Offset Value Range (Raise and Lower) 1 - 999

Elevation Deadband

Elevation Deadband is the area of the Working Window that is On-Grade While the reference is within that areathe paverrsquos valves are idle (closed) Therefore the wider the Elevation Deadband (On-Grade area) the more areference can move up or down without a correction being initiated Once the signal from the reference is outof the deadband your control box drives the hydraulics to place the reference back in the center of thedeadband

Deadband Elevation Value Range 1ndash30 mm

Before setting the Slope Gain ensure the machines hydraulic flow control valves are adjusted forproper cylinder speed according to the manufacturers recommendations

Do not set slope gain at a higher value than the elevation gain on the other side of the paver A highervalue may cause the slope to be over reactive

Set the Valve Offsets before adjusting elevation and slope gains and averaging

The offset value on one side of the paver may differ from the offset value on the other side of thepaver You must verify the offset values before swapping boxes Use the ldquoLeftrdquo and ldquoRightrdquo labelsprovided

Never attempt to use Valve Offsets to compensate for a slower raise or lower speed of your hydraulicvalves as it causes undershooting or overshooting in Slope Mode and can adversely affect the qualityof the mat

Select the amount of Elevation Deadband carefully Too small of an Elevation Deadband causes thetow point cylinder to constantly hunt up and down while the sensor tries to find On-Grade Too largeof an Elevation Deadband does not allow the sensor to send grade corrections to the values causingunwanted variations in mat thickness

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1923

lope Deadband 16GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Slope Deadband

Slope Deadband defines the size of the on-grade area where no valve corrections are made

Deadband Slope Value Range 0025ndash075

The wider the Slope Deadband the greater the slope can vary without initiating a correction

For example if the operator is grading at a 20 slope and the Slope Deadband is set at 10 the system

reads on-grade anywhere from 195 slope to 205 slope The lower the percentage the tighter the SlopeDeadband

Once the slope signal is out of the Slope Deadband System Five drives the hydraulics back within the SlopeDeadband

Working Window Adjustment

Working Window Adjustment adjusts the working window of the sonic tracker (Figure 5)

Working Window Settings 0ndash500 Off

Default 020

The default setting is 020 which gives 020 ft (61 mm) above and below on-grade Setting the value to Offcompletely disables the working window and allows any target to be seen

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 2023

lope Working Window 17GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Figure 5 Sonic Tracker Working Window

Slope Working Window

Slope Working Window adjusts the working window of the Slope Sensor (Figure 6)

Slope Working Window Value Range 01 - 100 Off

Default 20

The default setting is 20 which gives 20 slope above and below ongrade Setting the value to Off completelydisables the working window

Out of Range

Ongrade

Flashing UpDown Arrow

Solid UpDown Arrow

20rsquo

20rsquo

20rsquo

20rsquo

Working

Window

(Adjustable)

ST-3 Sonic Tracker II

When using the Sonic Tracker II to follow a stringline curb or other elevated reference there is adanger of making an unwanted cut if the Trackerrsquos sonic cone moves away from the target This canoccur if the working window is either off or set as high as the distance between the reference and theground Setting the working window to the default value of 20 (020ft) prevents the automatic controlfrom making such a reaction due to a loss of the target

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 2123

martlink (Elevation and Slope) 18GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Figure 6 Slope Working Window

Smartlink (Elevation and Slope)

Smartlink allows the Control Box to send a percentage of the slopeelevation correction on one side of themachine to the Control Box on the other side of the machine preemptively raising or lowering that hydrauliccylinder to keep the machine at the correct grade Smartlink decreases the lag in correction that can occur onone side of the machine as the second Control Box begins moving the valve without having to wait for thesensor on the other side of the machine to detect and correct for a change in elevationslope

Smartlink Value Range 0 - 100

Default 0

Out of Range

Working Window (Adjustable)

Ongrade

20

20

Ongrade

20

20

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 2223

Warranty 19GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

bull bull bull bull bull bull

Warranty

Topcon laser and electronic positioning equipment are guaranteed against defective material and workmanshipunder normal use and application consistent with this Manual The equipment is guaranteed for the period indicatedon the warranty card accompanying the product starting from the date that the product is sold to the originalpurchaser by Topconrsquos Authorized Dealers1

During the warranty period Topcon will at its option repair or replace this product at no additional charge Repairparts and replacement products will be furnished on an exchange basis and will be either reconditioned or new Thislimited warranty does not include service to repair damage to the product resulting from an accident disastermisuses abuse or modification of the product

Warranty service may be obtained from an authorized Topcon warranty service dealer If this product is deliveredby mail purchaser agrees to insure the product or assume the risk of loss or damage in transit to prepay shippingcharges to the warranty service location and to use the original shipping container or equivalent A letter shouldaccompany the package furnishing a description of the problem andor defect

The purchaserrsquos sole remedy shall be replacement as provided above In no event shall Topcon be liable for anydamages or other claim including any claim for lost profits lost savings or other incidental or consequential damagesarising out of the use of or inability to use the product

1 The warranty against defects in a Topcon battery charger or cable is 90 days

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 2323

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1823

lope Gain 15GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Slope Gain

This setting determines the speed at which your Topcon P-32 System allows the tow point cylinders to adjustto a change in slope For faster hydraulic response increase the gain value For slower hydraulic responsedecrease the gain value

The objective is to set the gain so the screed reacts to the change in grade quickly but without ldquoovershootingrdquoOn-Grade Slope Gain should not be set at a higher value than the Elevation Gain on the other side of the paver

Gain Elevation Value Range 1-100

Valve Offsets (Raise and Lower)

Valve Offsets is the minimum amount of electrical signals sent to the valve which causes the hydraulic cylinderto move If the valve offset is too small the sensor will not reach On-Grade Likewise if the valve offset valueis too large the sensor will move too much and overshoot On-Grade

Run the Paver until the hydraulic oil is at normal operating temperature before setting the valve offsets Oncethey are set you should not need to readjust the valve offsets unless the Control Box is moved to a new paveror the hydraulic performance changes

Valve Offset Value Range (Raise and Lower) 1 - 999

Elevation Deadband

Elevation Deadband is the area of the Working Window that is On-Grade While the reference is within that areathe paverrsquos valves are idle (closed) Therefore the wider the Elevation Deadband (On-Grade area) the more areference can move up or down without a correction being initiated Once the signal from the reference is outof the deadband your control box drives the hydraulics to place the reference back in the center of thedeadband

Deadband Elevation Value Range 1ndash30 mm

Before setting the Slope Gain ensure the machines hydraulic flow control valves are adjusted forproper cylinder speed according to the manufacturers recommendations

Do not set slope gain at a higher value than the elevation gain on the other side of the paver A highervalue may cause the slope to be over reactive

Set the Valve Offsets before adjusting elevation and slope gains and averaging

The offset value on one side of the paver may differ from the offset value on the other side of thepaver You must verify the offset values before swapping boxes Use the ldquoLeftrdquo and ldquoRightrdquo labelsprovided

Never attempt to use Valve Offsets to compensate for a slower raise or lower speed of your hydraulicvalves as it causes undershooting or overshooting in Slope Mode and can adversely affect the qualityof the mat

Select the amount of Elevation Deadband carefully Too small of an Elevation Deadband causes thetow point cylinder to constantly hunt up and down while the sensor tries to find On-Grade Too largeof an Elevation Deadband does not allow the sensor to send grade corrections to the values causingunwanted variations in mat thickness

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1923

lope Deadband 16GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Slope Deadband

Slope Deadband defines the size of the on-grade area where no valve corrections are made

Deadband Slope Value Range 0025ndash075

The wider the Slope Deadband the greater the slope can vary without initiating a correction

For example if the operator is grading at a 20 slope and the Slope Deadband is set at 10 the system

reads on-grade anywhere from 195 slope to 205 slope The lower the percentage the tighter the SlopeDeadband

Once the slope signal is out of the Slope Deadband System Five drives the hydraulics back within the SlopeDeadband

Working Window Adjustment

Working Window Adjustment adjusts the working window of the sonic tracker (Figure 5)

Working Window Settings 0ndash500 Off

Default 020

The default setting is 020 which gives 020 ft (61 mm) above and below on-grade Setting the value to Offcompletely disables the working window and allows any target to be seen

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 2023

lope Working Window 17GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Figure 5 Sonic Tracker Working Window

Slope Working Window

Slope Working Window adjusts the working window of the Slope Sensor (Figure 6)

Slope Working Window Value Range 01 - 100 Off

Default 20

The default setting is 20 which gives 20 slope above and below ongrade Setting the value to Off completelydisables the working window

Out of Range

Ongrade

Flashing UpDown Arrow

Solid UpDown Arrow

20rsquo

20rsquo

20rsquo

20rsquo

Working

Window

(Adjustable)

ST-3 Sonic Tracker II

When using the Sonic Tracker II to follow a stringline curb or other elevated reference there is adanger of making an unwanted cut if the Trackerrsquos sonic cone moves away from the target This canoccur if the working window is either off or set as high as the distance between the reference and theground Setting the working window to the default value of 20 (020ft) prevents the automatic controlfrom making such a reaction due to a loss of the target

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 2123

martlink (Elevation and Slope) 18GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Figure 6 Slope Working Window

Smartlink (Elevation and Slope)

Smartlink allows the Control Box to send a percentage of the slopeelevation correction on one side of themachine to the Control Box on the other side of the machine preemptively raising or lowering that hydrauliccylinder to keep the machine at the correct grade Smartlink decreases the lag in correction that can occur onone side of the machine as the second Control Box begins moving the valve without having to wait for thesensor on the other side of the machine to detect and correct for a change in elevationslope

Smartlink Value Range 0 - 100

Default 0

Out of Range

Working Window (Adjustable)

Ongrade

20

20

Ongrade

20

20

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 2223

Warranty 19GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

bull bull bull bull bull bull

Warranty

Topcon laser and electronic positioning equipment are guaranteed against defective material and workmanshipunder normal use and application consistent with this Manual The equipment is guaranteed for the period indicatedon the warranty card accompanying the product starting from the date that the product is sold to the originalpurchaser by Topconrsquos Authorized Dealers1

During the warranty period Topcon will at its option repair or replace this product at no additional charge Repairparts and replacement products will be furnished on an exchange basis and will be either reconditioned or new Thislimited warranty does not include service to repair damage to the product resulting from an accident disastermisuses abuse or modification of the product

Warranty service may be obtained from an authorized Topcon warranty service dealer If this product is deliveredby mail purchaser agrees to insure the product or assume the risk of loss or damage in transit to prepay shippingcharges to the warranty service location and to use the original shipping container or equivalent A letter shouldaccompany the package furnishing a description of the problem andor defect

The purchaserrsquos sole remedy shall be replacement as provided above In no event shall Topcon be liable for anydamages or other claim including any claim for lost profits lost savings or other incidental or consequential damagesarising out of the use of or inability to use the product

1 The warranty against defects in a Topcon battery charger or cable is 90 days

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 2323

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 1923

lope Deadband 16GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Slope Deadband

Slope Deadband defines the size of the on-grade area where no valve corrections are made

Deadband Slope Value Range 0025ndash075

The wider the Slope Deadband the greater the slope can vary without initiating a correction

For example if the operator is grading at a 20 slope and the Slope Deadband is set at 10 the system

reads on-grade anywhere from 195 slope to 205 slope The lower the percentage the tighter the SlopeDeadband

Once the slope signal is out of the Slope Deadband System Five drives the hydraulics back within the SlopeDeadband

Working Window Adjustment

Working Window Adjustment adjusts the working window of the sonic tracker (Figure 5)

Working Window Settings 0ndash500 Off

Default 020

The default setting is 020 which gives 020 ft (61 mm) above and below on-grade Setting the value to Offcompletely disables the working window and allows any target to be seen

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 2023

lope Working Window 17GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Figure 5 Sonic Tracker Working Window

Slope Working Window

Slope Working Window adjusts the working window of the Slope Sensor (Figure 6)

Slope Working Window Value Range 01 - 100 Off

Default 20

The default setting is 20 which gives 20 slope above and below ongrade Setting the value to Off completelydisables the working window

Out of Range

Ongrade

Flashing UpDown Arrow

Solid UpDown Arrow

20rsquo

20rsquo

20rsquo

20rsquo

Working

Window

(Adjustable)

ST-3 Sonic Tracker II

When using the Sonic Tracker II to follow a stringline curb or other elevated reference there is adanger of making an unwanted cut if the Trackerrsquos sonic cone moves away from the target This canoccur if the working window is either off or set as high as the distance between the reference and theground Setting the working window to the default value of 20 (020ft) prevents the automatic controlfrom making such a reaction due to a loss of the target

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 2123

martlink (Elevation and Slope) 18GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Figure 6 Slope Working Window

Smartlink (Elevation and Slope)

Smartlink allows the Control Box to send a percentage of the slopeelevation correction on one side of themachine to the Control Box on the other side of the machine preemptively raising or lowering that hydrauliccylinder to keep the machine at the correct grade Smartlink decreases the lag in correction that can occur onone side of the machine as the second Control Box begins moving the valve without having to wait for thesensor on the other side of the machine to detect and correct for a change in elevationslope

Smartlink Value Range 0 - 100

Default 0

Out of Range

Working Window (Adjustable)

Ongrade

20

20

Ongrade

20

20

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 2223

Warranty 19GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

bull bull bull bull bull bull

Warranty

Topcon laser and electronic positioning equipment are guaranteed against defective material and workmanshipunder normal use and application consistent with this Manual The equipment is guaranteed for the period indicatedon the warranty card accompanying the product starting from the date that the product is sold to the originalpurchaser by Topconrsquos Authorized Dealers1

During the warranty period Topcon will at its option repair or replace this product at no additional charge Repairparts and replacement products will be furnished on an exchange basis and will be either reconditioned or new Thislimited warranty does not include service to repair damage to the product resulting from an accident disastermisuses abuse or modification of the product

Warranty service may be obtained from an authorized Topcon warranty service dealer If this product is deliveredby mail purchaser agrees to insure the product or assume the risk of loss or damage in transit to prepay shippingcharges to the warranty service location and to use the original shipping container or equivalent A letter shouldaccompany the package furnishing a description of the problem andor defect

The purchaserrsquos sole remedy shall be replacement as provided above In no event shall Topcon be liable for anydamages or other claim including any claim for lost profits lost savings or other incidental or consequential damagesarising out of the use of or inability to use the product

1 The warranty against defects in a Topcon battery charger or cable is 90 days

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 2323

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 2023

lope Working Window 17GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Figure 5 Sonic Tracker Working Window

Slope Working Window

Slope Working Window adjusts the working window of the Slope Sensor (Figure 6)

Slope Working Window Value Range 01 - 100 Off

Default 20

The default setting is 20 which gives 20 slope above and below ongrade Setting the value to Off completelydisables the working window

Out of Range

Ongrade

Flashing UpDown Arrow

Solid UpDown Arrow

20rsquo

20rsquo

20rsquo

20rsquo

Working

Window

(Adjustable)

ST-3 Sonic Tracker II

When using the Sonic Tracker II to follow a stringline curb or other elevated reference there is adanger of making an unwanted cut if the Trackerrsquos sonic cone moves away from the target This canoccur if the working window is either off or set as high as the distance between the reference and theground Setting the working window to the default value of 20 (020ft) prevents the automatic controlfrom making such a reaction due to a loss of the target

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 2123

martlink (Elevation and Slope) 18GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Figure 6 Slope Working Window

Smartlink (Elevation and Slope)

Smartlink allows the Control Box to send a percentage of the slopeelevation correction on one side of themachine to the Control Box on the other side of the machine preemptively raising or lowering that hydrauliccylinder to keep the machine at the correct grade Smartlink decreases the lag in correction that can occur onone side of the machine as the second Control Box begins moving the valve without having to wait for thesensor on the other side of the machine to detect and correct for a change in elevationslope

Smartlink Value Range 0 - 100

Default 0

Out of Range

Working Window (Adjustable)

Ongrade

20

20

Ongrade

20

20

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 2223

Warranty 19GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

bull bull bull bull bull bull

Warranty

Topcon laser and electronic positioning equipment are guaranteed against defective material and workmanshipunder normal use and application consistent with this Manual The equipment is guaranteed for the period indicatedon the warranty card accompanying the product starting from the date that the product is sold to the originalpurchaser by Topconrsquos Authorized Dealers1

During the warranty period Topcon will at its option repair or replace this product at no additional charge Repairparts and replacement products will be furnished on an exchange basis and will be either reconditioned or new Thislimited warranty does not include service to repair damage to the product resulting from an accident disastermisuses abuse or modification of the product

Warranty service may be obtained from an authorized Topcon warranty service dealer If this product is deliveredby mail purchaser agrees to insure the product or assume the risk of loss or damage in transit to prepay shippingcharges to the warranty service location and to use the original shipping container or equivalent A letter shouldaccompany the package furnishing a description of the problem andor defect

The purchaserrsquos sole remedy shall be replacement as provided above In no event shall Topcon be liable for anydamages or other claim including any claim for lost profits lost savings or other incidental or consequential damagesarising out of the use of or inability to use the product

1 The warranty against defects in a Topcon battery charger or cable is 90 days

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 2323

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 2123

martlink (Elevation and Slope) 18GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

Figure 6 Slope Working Window

Smartlink (Elevation and Slope)

Smartlink allows the Control Box to send a percentage of the slopeelevation correction on one side of themachine to the Control Box on the other side of the machine preemptively raising or lowering that hydrauliccylinder to keep the machine at the correct grade Smartlink decreases the lag in correction that can occur onone side of the machine as the second Control Box begins moving the valve without having to wait for thesensor on the other side of the machine to detect and correct for a change in elevationslope

Smartlink Value Range 0 - 100

Default 0

Out of Range

Working Window (Adjustable)

Ongrade

20

20

Ongrade

20

20

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 2223

Warranty 19GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

bull bull bull bull bull bull

Warranty

Topcon laser and electronic positioning equipment are guaranteed against defective material and workmanshipunder normal use and application consistent with this Manual The equipment is guaranteed for the period indicatedon the warranty card accompanying the product starting from the date that the product is sold to the originalpurchaser by Topconrsquos Authorized Dealers1

During the warranty period Topcon will at its option repair or replace this product at no additional charge Repairparts and replacement products will be furnished on an exchange basis and will be either reconditioned or new Thislimited warranty does not include service to repair damage to the product resulting from an accident disastermisuses abuse or modification of the product

Warranty service may be obtained from an authorized Topcon warranty service dealer If this product is deliveredby mail purchaser agrees to insure the product or assume the risk of loss or damage in transit to prepay shippingcharges to the warranty service location and to use the original shipping container or equivalent A letter shouldaccompany the package furnishing a description of the problem andor defect

The purchaserrsquos sole remedy shall be replacement as provided above In no event shall Topcon be liable for anydamages or other claim including any claim for lost profits lost savings or other incidental or consequential damagesarising out of the use of or inability to use the product

1 The warranty against defects in a Topcon battery charger or cable is 90 days

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 2323

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 2223

Warranty 19GC-35 Control Box Technical Reference Manual PN 1001548-02

bull bull bull bull bull bull

Warranty

Topcon laser and electronic positioning equipment are guaranteed against defective material and workmanshipunder normal use and application consistent with this Manual The equipment is guaranteed for the period indicatedon the warranty card accompanying the product starting from the date that the product is sold to the originalpurchaser by Topconrsquos Authorized Dealers1

During the warranty period Topcon will at its option repair or replace this product at no additional charge Repairparts and replacement products will be furnished on an exchange basis and will be either reconditioned or new Thislimited warranty does not include service to repair damage to the product resulting from an accident disastermisuses abuse or modification of the product

Warranty service may be obtained from an authorized Topcon warranty service dealer If this product is deliveredby mail purchaser agrees to insure the product or assume the risk of loss or damage in transit to prepay shippingcharges to the warranty service location and to use the original shipping container or equivalent A letter shouldaccompany the package furnishing a description of the problem andor defect

The purchaserrsquos sole remedy shall be replacement as provided above In no event shall Topcon be liable for anydamages or other claim including any claim for lost profits lost savings or other incidental or consequential damagesarising out of the use of or inability to use the product

1 The warranty against defects in a Topcon battery charger or cable is 90 days

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 2323

7172019 GC 35 Tecnical Reference Manual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullgc-35-tecnical-reference-manual 2323